table of contents - burlington, ma · pine haven cemetery september 25, 2012 new columbarium garden...

Pine Haven Cemetery September 25, 2012 New Columbarium Garden Burlington, MA

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

COVER ............................................................................................................................... 1 APPENDIX A - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................... 2 INVITATION TO BID ....................................................................................................... 4 SCOPE OF WORK AND SCHEDULE .............................................................................. 5 LOCATION OF WORK ..................................................................................................... 5 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................. 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ........................................................................................ 6 FORM OF GENERAL BID .............................................................................................. 11 SUPPLEMENTAL FORMS FOR GENERAL BID-BASE BID ITEMS ........................ 14 SUPPLEMENTAL FORMS FOR GENERAL BID-ADD ALTERNATE BID ITEMS. 18 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION .......................................................................... 19 TAX COMPLIANCE........................................................................................................ 20 LABOR HARMONY/OSHA 10-HOUR .......................................................................... 21 BID FORM AGREEMENT .............................................................................................. 22 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ................................................................................... 23 MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION .................................................................... 27 WOMEN BUSINESS PARTICIPATION……………………………………………… 29 SPECIAL CONDITIONS………………………………………………………………. 31 GENERAL CONDITIONS…………………………………………………………… ..33 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ………………………………………………….. 44 WAGE RATES ………………………………………………………………………… 46 APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 2300 ALTERNATES 01 3113 PROJECT COORDINATION 01 3119 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 3300 SUBMITTALS 01 4500 QUALITY CONTROL 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROLS 01 5719 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 6600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 7000 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 7123 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7830 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 8900 SITE CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


3

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 0503 MORTARS 04 4000 PROJECT STONE 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 7450 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 1213 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 31 2319 DEWATERING 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 5000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1313 REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING 32 1645 GRANITE CURB 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 9200 PLANTING 32 9220 LAWNS DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 0000 SITE UTILITIES


4

INVITATION TO BID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS - M.G.L. CHAPTER 30 § 39M The Town of Burlington, MA Engineering Division invites bids for the NEW COLUMBARIUM GARDEN, PINE HAVEN CEMETERY described in the Engineering Specification CEM 12-1129-2. The Bid Form for this contract must be individually sealed in an envelope addressed to the Engineering Division, Town Hall Annex, 25 Center Street, Burlington, MA 01803 endorsed with the name and address of the bidder and clearly marked with the applicable contract name and number. All bids must be submitted before 10:30 a.m. on October 24, 2012. All bids will be opened and publicly read beginning at 10:30 a.m. on October 24, 2012. The Town of Burlington reserves the right to award and/or reject any and all bids or proposals for any reason determined to be in the Town’s best interest. All bids shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the amount of not less than five percent (5%). Bid deposit shall be in the form of a bid bond, Treasurer’s check or Cashier’s check issued by a responsible bank or trust company in the amount of that contained in the specifications. Bid documents, including Contract Plans and Specifications for the proposed work, are available for a reproduction fee of fifty ($50.00) dollars beginning Wednesday, October 3, 2012 at the Engineering Division located at Town Hall Annex, 25 Center Street, Burlington, MA 01803, or from the Town of Burlington web page at: http://www.burlington.org/engineering/engineering.htm A performance bond in an amount equal to one hundred (100) percent of the total amount of the bid with a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts will be required for the faithful performance of the contract as well as a labor and materials bond in an amount equal to one hundred (100) percent of the total bid amount. All bids for this project are subject to applicable public bidding laws of Massachusetts, including General Laws Chapter 30, Section 39M as amended. Attention is directed to the minimum wage rates to be paid as determined by the Commissioner of labor and Industries under the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 149, Section 26 and 27D inclusive. All Bids will be evaluated on the basis of the Construction Cost Base Contract bid price (Page 14) plus the sum of accepted Add Alternate Bid prices (Page 18). Also see Page 13 for a list of the Add Alternate Bid items. The bidder shall start work under these contracts on the date stated in the specifications after its acceptance by the Board of Selectmen. No bidder may withdraw his bid within thirty (30) days after the date of opening thereof. Wages and contributions to be paid to employees on the project shall not be less than those specified by Massachusetts General Law: Chapter 149, Section 26 and Section 27, Department of Labor and Workforce Development’s Division of Occupational Safety.


5

SCOPE OF WORK AND SCHEDULE Base Bid Work includes the installation of 5 Columbarium Walls including concrete foundations, granite veneer, granite niche covers, granite end walls, granite cap and base stones and pre-fabricated modular niche system; 2 fountain basins complete with solid granite seat walls, granite paving, carved boulders, and mechanical equipment including pump, fiberglass vault, water lines and eyeball fittings; new granite unit paving, 2 granite benches, 1 granite monument, flush and raised granite curbing, lawns, tree, shrub and perennial planting; new HDPE drain lines, PVC leaching basin and all new electrical connections to the existing electric box. The Contractor shall use the Landscape Architect’s CAD files to layout all new improvements. There are 2 Alternates, described herein on Page 13. The Town has installed water and electrical lines to the site and is responsible for providing the irrigation controller and new irrigation system. At all times during the construction of this project, all funeral processions within the cemetery shall take precedence. Work may be required to temporarily stop while processions are taking place and may resume once processions are complete. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs due to stoppages; however, the Contract duration shall be extended in the amount of the stoppage. Additionally, the Cemetery Superintendent shall coordinate with the Contractor ahead of time regarding all scheduled processions. All construction work shall be finished no later than the completion date of July 1, 2013. The Contractor shall not exceed contract limits without written authorization from the Superintendent of Public Works.

LOCATION OF WORK The work to be completed is located on the northeastern portion of #84 Bedford St., Burlington, MA 01803.

GENERAL INFORMATION Contractor must submit a schedule must be presented with the bid showing an order of all work that is to take place; all work must be scheduled in order (silt fence, concrete, granite, etc) with estimated completion times. All excavation resulting from this project must comply with MGL c. 82A and 520 CMR 14.

Trenches must not be left open and must be secured at the end of each day either by plating or backfill, open trenches and barricades are not acceptable.


6

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. Receipt and Opening of Bids The Town of Burlington, Massachusetts, herein called the Owner, acting by and through its Engineering Division, will receive sealed Bids for the New Columbarium Garden, Pine Haven Cemetery. Such bids shall be addressed to the Assistant Town Engineer, Engineering Division, Town Hall Annex, 25 Center Street, Burlington, MA 01803, and received at the Office of the Department of Public Works as stated in the INVITATION FOR BIDS at which time and place said bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date specified will not be considered. The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 30 days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after opening the bids. 2. Location and Work to be Done For a description of work to be done see above section entitled “SCOPE OF WORK AND SCHEDULE.” The Contractor shall furnish all labor, services, materials, equipment, plant, machinery, apparatus, appliances, tools, supplies, and all other things necessary to do all work required for the completion of each item of the Work and as herein specified. The Work to be done and paid for under any item shall not be limited to the exact extent mentioned or described but shall include all incidental work necessary or customarily done for the completion of that item. 3. Preparation of Bid Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed form. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his address, and endorsed with the name of the project as specified in Receipt and Opening of Bids. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed as specified in Receipt and Opening of Bids. 4. Bid Opening Procedure The following list of requirements shall apply to each filed bid. Bids not meeting all the requirements for timeliness and security will be rejected without opening; bids not meeting signature and addenda requirements will be rejected prior to checking of bid amounts. Bids shall be filed at the place and before the time specified in Receipt and Opening of Bids. Properly executed bid security shall be placed in a sealed envelope and shall be attached to the outside of the envelope containing the bid. Bid signatures will be checked. All addenda will be sent certified mail, with return receipt requested, to all prospective bidders and the last of which will be mailed not later than five days prior to the date established for submission of bids. All bidders shall include with their bids the written acknowledgment form provided in FORM OF GENERAL BID.


7

The total dollar amount of each bid will be read, and the three apparent lowest bids will be selected for further consideration. These three apparent low bids will be read aloud for the benefit of the other bidders and the bid opening procedure will be closed. All those present at the bid opening may examine all bids after the bid opening and after the reading of the three apparent low bids. 5. Ability and Experience of Bidder No award will be made to any bidder who cannot satisfy the Owner that he has sufficient ability and experience in this class of work and sufficient capital and plant to enable him to prosecute and complete the work successfully within the time named. The Owner’s decision or judgment on these matters will be final, conclusive, and binding.

Bidder and his/her sub consultants shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience and have completed satisfactorily five (5) jobs within that time of similar size and scope. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner, under oath if so requires, all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. 6. Condition of Work Each bidder must familiarize himself fully with the conditions relating to the construction of the project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of his obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of his contract. Insofar as possible the Contractor, in carrying out his work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the work of any other Contractor. 7. Addenda and Interpretations No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made to any bidder orally. All information given to bidders other than by means of the plans, specifications, or by addenda, as described below, is given informally and shall not be used as the basis of a claim against the Owner. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to the Assistant Town Engineer, Engineering Division, Town Hall Annex, 25 Center Street, Burlington, MA 01803 and to be given consideration must be received at least seven days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, when issued, will be mailed by certified mail with return receipt requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective address furnished by them for such purposes), no later than five days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder for many obligations under this bid as submitted; all addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 8. Basis of Award: The Contract shall be awarded according to the sole discretion of the TOWN. Award shall be based upon, but not limited to: Cost, Experience, Proposed Methods of Operations and the most Responsive and Responsible Bidder. The TOWN reserves the right to reject all proposals or take other action deemed to be in the best interest of the TOWN. Conditional proposals will not be accepted.

The Town will award the contract based on the Base Bid plus the sum of the accepted Add Alternate Bids. The Add Alternate Bids will be chosen in order of importance to the Town and listed as Add Alternates 1 and 2, 1 being the most important and 2 being the least important. The number of Add Alternates chosen will be determined based on the bid amounts as they compare to the total project funding amount available to the Town.


8

9. Security for Faithful Performance Simultaneously with his delivery of the executed Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for faithful performance of this contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor and materials under this contract as specified in GENERAL CONDITIONS included herein. The surety on such bond or bonds shall be a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the Owner. The bonds shall remain in force for one year after final acceptance of the work by the Owner, unless the Owner, in writing, releases the Contractor from the obligation sooner. 10. Power of Attorney Attorney-in-fact who signs Contract Bonds must file each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney. 11. Laws and Regulations The bidder’s attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulation of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written out in full. 12. Liquidated Damages for Failure to Enter into Contract The successful bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the Contract and bonds required within ten days after he/she has received notice of the acceptance of his/her bid, shall forfeit to the Owner, a liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, a portion of security deposited with his/her bid, but the amount forfeited shall not exceed the difference between his/her bid price and the bid price of the next lowest responsible and eligible bidder. In case of death, disability, bona fide clerical or mechanical error of a substantial nature, or other similar unforeseen circumstances affecting the bidder, his/her bid deposit will be returned. 13. Obligation to Bidder At the time of the opening of bids each bidder will be presumed to have inspected the site and to have read and to be thoroughly familiar with the Contract Documents (including all addenda). The failure or omission of any bidder to examine any form, instrument, or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect of his bid. 14. Information Not Guaranteed All information given in the Contract Documents relating to subsurface and other conditions, natural phenomena, existing pipes, and other structures is from the best sources at present available to the Owner. All such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of bidders and is not guaranteed. It is agreed and understood that the Owner does not warrant or guarantee that the subsurface or other conditions, natural phenomena, existing pipes, or other structures encountered during construction will be the same as those indicated in the Contract Documents. If is further agreed and understood that no bidder or Contractor shall use of be entitled to use any of the information made available to him or obtained in any examination made by him in any manner as a basis of or ground for any claim or demand against the Owner or the Engineer, arising from or by reason of any variance which may exist between the information made available and the actual subsurface or other structures actually encountered during the construction work, except as may otherwise be expressly provided for in the Contract Documents. 15. Bid Security


9

Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check, a bid bond, cash, a treasurer’s or cashier’s check, payable to the Town, in the amount stated in INVITATION TO BID. Such checks will be returned to all except the three lowest responsible and eligible bidders within five days, Saturday, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of bids, and the remaining checks will be returned promptly after the Owner and the accepted bidder have executed the Contract, or if no notice of intent to award has been presented to the selected contractor within 30 days, Saturdays, Sundays and holidays excluded, after the date of the opening of bids, upon demand of the bidder at any time thereafter. 16. Right to Reject Bid The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities, or reject any and all bids and alternate bids, should the Owner deem it to be in the public interest to do so. The Owner may also reject bids which in its sole judgment are either incomplete, conditional, obscure or not responsive or which contain additions not called for, erasures not properly initialed, alterations, or similar irregularities, or the Owner may waive such omissions, conditions or irregularities. The Owner also reserves the right to reject the bid of any bidder that the Owner considers to be unqualified based on the criteria set forth in Article 6 herein. 17. Time for Completion The bidder must agree to commence work within ten (10) days of the date of the Notice to Proceed and to fully complete the project within the time limit stated in the Form for General Bid. 18. Comparison of Bids Bids will be compared on the basis of the quantities and unit and lump sum prices set forth in the Base Bid and Alternates bid forms. In the event that there is a discrepancy in the FORM OF GENERAL BID between the lump sum or unit prices written in words and figures, the prices written in words will govern. The Owner agrees to examine and consider each FORM OF GENERAL BID submitted in consideration of the qualifications of the bidder and the bidder’s agreements, as herein above set forth and as set forth in FORM OF GENERAL BID. 19. Award of Contract The Contract will be awarded to “the lowest responsible and eligible bidder” for the total of the items one through ten pursuant to General Laws Chapter 30, Section 39M, as amended. Such a bidder shall possess the skill ability and integrity necessary for the faithful performance of the work, shall be able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed, or to be employed, in the work, and shall otherwise comply with all applicable provisions of law. 20. Statutes Regulating Competitive Bidding Any bid that does not comply with the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws Chapter 30, Section 39M as amended, need not be accepted and the Owner may reject every such bid. 21. Wage Rates Prevailing Wage Rates as determined by the Commissioner of Department of Labor and Industries under the provision of the Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 149, Section 26 to 27G, as amended, apply to this project. It


10

is the responsibility of the contractor, before bid opening to request if necessary, any additional information on Prevailing Wage Rates for those trades people who may be employed for the proposed work under this contract.

FOR CURRENT WAGE RATES LOG ONTO WWW.MASS.GOV/DOLS/PW. 22. Contractor Records The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Massachusetts General Laws, Chapter 30, Section 39R, concerning Contractor records. 23. Insurance The Contractor shall carry and continuously maintain until completion of the Contract, insurance as shown in Article 11 and in such form as shall protect him performing work covered by this Contract, or the Town of Burlington and its employees, agents and officials, from all claims and liability for damages for bodily injury, including accidental death, and for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract. The Contractor covenants and agrees to hold the Town and its employees, agents and officials harmless from loss or damage due to claims for personal injury and/or property damage arising from, or in connection with operations under this contract. 24. Affirmative Action/Equal Employment Opportunity Laws and Regulations Burlington is an affirmative action/equal opportunity owner/purchase. The bidder’s attention is directed to all applicable State Laws, Town Bylaws, and rules and regulations regarding affirmative action/equal employment opportunity requirements. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women’s Business Enterprise (WBE) goals of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and the Town of Burlington are applicable to this Contract. The goal for this project is a minimum of eleven (11) percent MBE participation and five (5) percent WBE participation by state-certified MBEs and WBEs. 25. All specifications and bid items are based on “Standard Specifications for Highway & Bridges” 1995 edition as revised.


11

FORM OF GENERAL BID Bid of ____________________________________(hereinafter called “Bidder”)* (____) a corporation, organized and existing under the laws of the state of ___________. (____) a partnership (____) a joint venture (____) an individual doing business as ___________________________________ To the Town of Burlington, Massachusetts (hereinafter called “Owner”). Gentlemen: The bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids having examined the specifications with related documents and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies, and to construct the project in accordance with the contract documents within the time set forth below, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, or which this proposal is a part. The Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be specified in written “Notice to Proceed” of the Owner, and to fully complete the project as specified The Bidder further agrees to pay as liquidated damages the sum of Four Hundred Dollars, $400.00 Dollars for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in the General Conditions. ---------------------- *Insert corporation, partnership or individual as applicable.


12

Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:

No. Dated:

No. Dated:

No. Dated:

No. Dated:

No. Dated:

The Bidder agrees to perform the base bid and add alternate work described in the specifications and shown on the plans. The unit prices shall include all labor, materials, bailing, shoring, removal, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished work of the several kinds called for. The Bidder understands that all bids for this project are subject to the applicable bidding laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, including General Laws Chapter 30, Section 39M, as amended. The Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 30 days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of bids. Within 10 days of receipt of the written notice of acceptance of this bid, the Bidder will execute the formal Agreement herein. Bid security is attached in the sum of five percent (5%) of the total bid in accordance with the conditions of INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The bid security may become the property of the owner in the event the contract and bond are not executed within the time set forth above. The selected Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond in an amount at least equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract prices. All bids must be submitted on the BID FORM provided by this office. ADD ALTERNATES Each General Bidder shall acknowledge Alternates by completing the section entitled “Supplemental Forms for General Bid – Add Alternate Bid Items”, entering the dollar amount of addition or subtraction necessitated by each Alternate listed in the corresponding space. General Bidders shall enter on the “Supplemental Forms for General Bid – Add Alternate Bid Items” a single amount for each Alternate which shall consist of total of all items necessary for that Add Alternate. In the event that an Alternate does not involve a change in dollar value, the General Bidder shall so indicate by listing the individual Alternate number and acknowledge the Alternate by inserting “No Change”, “No Charge”, “N/C” or “0” in the corresponding space provided for the dollar value of that Alternate. The Add Alternate Bids will be chosen in order of importance to the TOWN and as listed as Add Alternate 1 and 2, 1 being the most important and 2 being the least important. The Low Bidder will be determined on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the accepted Add Alternates.


13

ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 The work under Add Alternate No. 1 consists of substituting ‘BARRE GRAY’ Granite for ‘GI-614’ Granite in all locations where ‘GI-614’ Granite has been specified. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 The work under Add Alternate No. 2 consists of substituting ‘RAINBOW’ Granite for ‘DAKOTA MAHOGANY’ Granite in all locations where ‘Dakota Mahogany’ Granite has been specified. For locations where the above stones are specified in the Base Bid, refer to Specification Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE, included in Division 04, herein.


14

Supplemental Forms for General Bid - BASE BID ITEMS

Item # Description Units Quantity Unit Price Total Price

015000.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

AND CONTROLS LS 1 $ $

015713.01 SILT FENCE LF 65 $ $

015719.01 TEMPORARY

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

LS 1 $ $

033000.01 CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE (materials & installation)

CY 66 $ $

044000.01 GRANITE FOR

COLUMBARIUM WALLS (materials only)

LS 1 $ $

044000.02 GRANITE FOR FOUNTAIN

WALLS & PAVING (materials only)

LS 1 $ $

044000.03 GRANITE FOR PAVING

(materials only) LS 1 $ $

044000.04 GRANITE FOR PLANTER

CURB (materials only) LS 1 $ $

044000.05 GRANITE FOR BENCHES


044000.06 GRANITE FOR RAISED CURB (materials only)

LS 1 $ $

044000.07 GRANITE FOR FLUSH CURB (materials only)

LS 1 $ $

044000.08 GRANITE FOR MONUMENT


044000.09 GRANITE FOR

BOULDERS AT FOUNTAIN (materials only)

LS 1 $ $

044000.10 GRANITE FOR NICHE

COVERS (materials only) EA 462 $ $

044300.01 INSTALLATION OF

GRANITE COLUMBARIUM WALLS

LS 1 $ $

PAGE

SUBTOTAL $


15


GRANITE FOUNTAIN BASIN WALLS

LS 1 $ $


GRANITE CURBING LS 1 $ $


GRANITE BENCHES LS 1 $ $


GRANITE MONUMENT LS 1 $

$


BOULDERS AT FOUNTAIN LS 1 $

$

044300.07 INSTALLATION OF NICHE

COVERS LS 1 $

$

107450.01 COLUMBARIUM

ASSEMBLIES (materials and installation)

LS 1 $ $

131213.01 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL

SYSTEM (materials and installation)

LS 1 $ $

310510.01 BORROW

(materials only) CY 24 $ $

310510.02 3/4” CRUSHED STONE

(materials only) CY 15 $ $

310510.03 DENSE GRADED CR.

STONE BASE (materials only)

CY 50 $ $

310510.04 SAND BEDDING (materials only)

CY 8 $ $

311100.01 CLEARING AND

GRUBBING SY 510 $ $

311413.01 STRIPPING AND

STOCKPILING OF SOILS CY 85 $ $

312213.01 ROUGH GRADING

(labor only) CY 100 $ $

PAGE

SUBTOTAL $


16

312300.01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION (labor only)

CY 20 $ $

312300.02 FILLING (labor only) CY 180 $ $

312300.03 REMOVAL OF UNSATISFACTORY SOIL MATERIALS

LS 1 $ $

312300.04 REMOVAL OF BOULDERS GREATER THAN 1-1/2 CUBIC YARDS

LS 1 $ $

312319.01 DEWATERING LS 1 $ $

321216.01 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING (labor & materials)

SF 130 $ $

321216.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB (labor & materials)

LF 35 $ $

321313.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE SLABS (labor & materials)

SF 1400 $ $

321440.01 INSTALLATION OF GRANITE UNIT PAVING

SF 1500 $ $

329119.01 LANDSCAPE GRADING (labor & materials)

CY 85 $ $

329200.01 DECIDUOUS TREES EA 6 $ $

329200.02 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS EA 5 $ $

329200.03 GRASSES LS 1 $ $

329200.04 PERENNIALS LS 1 $ $

329220.01 SEEDED PERMANENT TURF

SF 2300 $ $

330000.01 HDPE PIPING

LF 150 $ $

330000.02 PVC SLEEVE EA 1 $ $

330000.03 LEACHING BASIN (labor & materials)

EA 1 $ $

PAGE

SUBTOTAL $


18

Supplemental Forms for General Bid- ADD ALTERNATE BID ITEMS

Add Alternate Number 1

044000.11

SUBSTITUTE ‘BARRE GRAY’ GRANITE FOR ‘GI-614’ GRANITE

LS 1 $ $

TOTAL

ADD ALT. #1 $ TOTAL ADD ALTERNATE #1 PRICE IN WORDS:

Add Alternate Number 2

044000.12

SUBSTITUTE ‘RAINBOW’ GRANITE FOR ‘DAKOTA MAHOGANY’ GRANITE

LS 1 $ $

TOTAL ADD ALT. #2 $

TOTAL ADD ALTERNATE #2 PRICE IN WORDS:


19

CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION

The undersigned certifies under penalties of perjury that this bid or proposal has been made and submitted under good faith and without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this certification, the word “person” shall mean any natural person, business, partnership, corporation, union, committee, club, or other organization, entity, or group of individuals. ___________________________________ (Name of person signing bid or proposal) ___________________________________ (Name of Business)


20

TAX COMPLIANCE

Pursuant to Massachusetts General Law Chapter 62C, Section 49A, I, of and an Officer authorized so to do, certify under the penalties of perjury that said Corporation has complied with all the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts relating to taxes and have filed all state tax returns and paid all state taxes required under law. Social Security Number or Federal Identification Number Signature of Individual or Corporation Name Corporation Officer (if Applicable)


21

LABOR HARMONY/OSHA 10-HOUR I will furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed in the work, and All employees to be employed in the work subject to this bid have successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational Safety and Health administration that is at least 10 hours in duration.

Name of person signing bid or proposal

Name of Business


22

BID FORM AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made this __________day of ________, _____, by and between the party of the first part, the Town of Burlington, hereinafter called “OWNER”, acting herein through its Town Administrator, and the party of the second part, _______________________ doing business as *(an individual) (a partnership) (a joint venture) (a corporation) located in the *(City) (Town) of ________________, County of _________________, and State of______________________, hereinafter called “CONTRACTOR”. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the OWNER to commence and complete the project described as follows: NEW COLUMBARIUM GARDEN, PINE HAVEN CEMETERY, hereinafter called the Project, for the sum of __________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________ Dollars ($______________) and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the Contract Documents; and at his (its and their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said project in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in FORM OF GENERAL BID, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Contract Documents as prepared by the Owner. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on or before a date to be specified in written “Notice to Proceed” of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR further agrees to fully complete the project by July 1, 2013. The CONTRACTOR further agrees to pay as liquidated damages the sum of $400.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as provided in the Liquidated Damages Paragraph of the GENERAL CONDITIONS. The goal for minority business enterprise (MBE) and women’s business enterprise (WBE) participation for this contract is a minimum of eleven (11) percent MBE participation and five (5) percent WBE participation, in the basis of the total dollars paid. The CONTRACTOR agrees to take all affirmative steps necessary to achieve this goal, and shall provide reports documenting the portion of contract and subcontract dollars paid to minority and women-owned businesses, and its efforts to achieve the goals, with each invoice submitted or at such greater intervals as specified by the Owner. The contractor shall require similar reports from its subcontractors. --------------------------- *Strike our inapplicable terms.


23

CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE This is to certify that the ________________________(Company) has issued the policies listed below, that theses policies are written in accordance with the Company’s standard policies and endorsements, except as indicated below or as noted in the attachments hereto, which policies and endorsements will be made available to OWNER upon request, that they provide coverage and limits of liability shown with respect to the insurance indicated, that they are in force on this date, that all deductible amounts are indicated below, and that this Certificate is furnished in accordance with and for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of OWNER in connection with the award and performance of a contract or agreement between the Town of Burlington (OWNER) and 1. Name of Insured

2. Address of Insured

3. Location and Description of Work

4. Project Contract No.

General Liability

Includes:

• Comprehensive form

• Premises/Operations

• Underground Explosion & Collapse Hazard

• Products / Completed Operations

• Independent Contractors

• Broad From Property Damage

• Personal Injury

Each Occurrence $1,000,000

Aggregate $2,000,000

Automobile Liability

Includes:

• All Owned Vehicles

• Hired Vehicles

• Non-owned Vehicles

Bodily Injury & Property Damage Combined

$1,000,000

Workers Compensation & Employers Liability

• As Required by State of Massachusetts

Each Accident $100,000

Bodily Injury by Disease (Policy Limit)

$500,000

Bodily Injury by Disease (Each Employee)

$100,000

Additional Insurance / Requirements

*The Town of Burlington Shall be named as Additional Insured


24

CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, and hold harmless OWNER and its consultants, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, direct, indirect or consequential (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that nay such claim damage, loss or expense(s) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting there from and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified there under or arises by or is imposed by Law and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such party. In any and all claims against OWNER or any of its consultants, agents or employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, and subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under the above paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such subcontractor or other person or organization under workers’ or workmen’s compensation acts, disability benefits acts or other employee benefits acts. Such insurance as is herein certified applies to all operations of the insured in connection with, and necessary and incidental to, the work herein described at the locations stated. It is hereby understood and agreed that the above policies will not be restrictively amended, materially changed nor canceled without 30 days advance notice by registered mail to OWNER_________________________________________________________. _____________________________ ________________________________ Authorized Representative Signature Address (Including Evidence of Authorization)


25

The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of his qualifications to perform the work as bid upon according to all the requirements of the plans and specifications. 1. Have been in business under present name for years. 2. The names and addresses of all persons interested in the bid (if made by a partnership or corporation) as

Principals, are as follows:

(attach supplementary list if necessary) 3. The bidder is requested to state below what work of a similar character to that included in the proposed contract he has done, and give references that will enable the Owner to judge his experience, skill and business standing (add supplementary page if necessary).

Date Project Bid Price Engineer Reference

4. Bank reference __________________________________ (Name) (Bank) (Address) (Telephone No.) Pursuant to M.G.L. Ch. 62C, Sec 49A, I certify under the penalties of perjury that I, to my best knowledge and belief, have filed all state tax returns and paid all State Taxes Required under law.


26

The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed in the work. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women’s Business Enterprise (WBE) policies of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and the Town of Burlington are applicable to this Contract. The goal for this project is a minimum of eleven (11) percent MBE participation and five (5) percent WBE participation by state-certified MBEs and WBEs. The bidder shall submit completed MBE/WBE forms (Letter of Intent) with the bid. The undersigned certifies under penalties of perjury that this bid is in all respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this paragraph the word “person” shall mean any neutral person, joint venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. Respectfully submitted: Date:_________ By:_________________________ (Signature) ____________________________ (Name of Bidder) (Seal if bid is by a corporation) ____________________________ (Title) ____________________________ (Business Address) ____________________________ (City and State) _____________________________ (Telephone Number)


27

MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION

LETTER OF INTENT

(To be completed and submitted as part of bid proposal.) The undersigned intends to perform work in connection with the above project as (check one): ( ) an individual ( ) a partnership ( ) a corporation ( ) a joint venture The minority status of the undersigned is (a) certified by the State Office of Minority Women Business Assistance or (b) has applied for certification on the attached Minority Business Certification Application. The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described work in connection with the above project. (Specify in detail particular work items or parts thereof to be performed.) __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ at the following price: _____________________________________________________. You have projected the following commencement date for such work, and the undersigned is projecting completion of such work as follows: Items Projected Commencement Projected Date Completion Date The above work will not be subcontracted to a non-minority business. The undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with you for the above work conditions upon your execution of a contract for the above project. Date:_________________ __________________________________ Name of Minority Business


28

SCHEDULE FOR PARTICIPATION BY MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES

(To be completed and submitted as part of bid proposal.)

Name of Minority Business Enterprise Total Price

Total Bid Amount _________ Total amount to be paid to Minority Business Enterprises ____________ PERCENT OF TOTAL BID PRICE WHICH IS TO BE PAID TO MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES FOR WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT __________________%


29

WOMEN BUSINESS PARTICIPATION

LETTER OF INTENT

(To be completed and submitted as part of bid proposal.) The undersigned intends to perform work in connection with the above project as (check one): ( ) an individual ( ) a partnership ( ) a corporation ( ) a joint venture The minority status of the undersigned is (a) certified by the State Office of Minority Women Business Assistance or (b) has applied for certification on the attached Minority Business Certification Application. The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described work in connection with the above project. (Specify in detail particular work items or parts thereof to be performed.) _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ at the following price: _____________________________________________________. You have projected the following commencement date for such work, and the undersigned is projecting completion of such work as follows: Items Projected Commencement Projected Date Completion Date The above work will not be subcontracted to a non-women business. The undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with you for the above work conditions upon your execution of a contract for the above project. Date:__________________ __________________________________ Name of Women Business


30

SCHEDULE FOR PARTICIPATION BY WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES

(To be completed and submitted as part of bid proposal.)

Name of Women Business Enterprise Total Price

Total Bid Amount _________ Total amount to be paid to Women Business Enterprises ___________________ PERCENT OF TOTAL BID PRICE WHICH IS TO BE PAID TO WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES FOR WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT __________________%


31

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1. The Town of Burlington, acting through its Board of Selectmen, an awarding authority, reserves the right to accept or reject any and/or all bids or portions thereof, and to waive any informalities in bidding, and/or to make the award as appears in the best interest of the Town of Burlington.

2. The bid will be awarded to the lowest qualified and responsible bidder.

3. Payment will be made monthly, unless otherwise specified.

4. Normal Hours of work: Work hours shall be between the hours of 7:00 AM and 3:30 PM Monday through

Friday, unless otherwise specified. The successful Contractor shall not work on Saturdays, Sundays, Holidays or other hours, without express authority from the Director of Public Works.

5. The successful bidder must provide proof of all licenses, where applicable.

6. Insurance – The successful bidder shall be required to file an Insurance Certificate with the Department of

Public Works with policy limits as specified in the attached Insurance Requirements.

7. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract and of the specifications wherein as definite and certain lengths of times if fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the Contract and additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit by such extension shall be of the extent of this Contract. Provided, that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor’s reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner.

A. Provided further that the Contractor shall, within ten (10) days from the beginning of such delay,

unless the Owner shall grant a further period of time prior to the date of the final settlement of the Contract, notify the Owner, in writing of the causes of the delay, who shall ascertain the facts and extent of the delay and notify the Contractor within a reasonable time of its decision in the matter.

8. Legal Damages – If the Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herin

specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the contractor does hereby agree, as a part consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay to Owner the amount of $ 100.00 per day, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach of Contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contract shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract for completing the work.

A. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because

of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the Owner would sustain and said amount shall be retained from time to time by the Owner from current periodical estimates.

9. This Contract includes estimated quantities that may or may not be purchased during Fiscal Year.

Additionally, quantities are used for comparison of bids and establishing the Bid Deposit and Performance Bond amounts.

10. This Contract may be terminated, with fifteen (15) days notice, for unsatisfactory performance and/or

availability of funds. The contractor will hold the Town harmless from all damages as a result of funding restraints.

11. All work and/or supplies must meet the approval of the Director of Public Works or his designee.


32

12. No bid may be withdrawn within thirty (30) days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after

the opening of bids.

13. All bid prices shall be held firm for one year from the date of contract award.

14. The Town of Burlington acting through its Board of Selectmen, reserves the right to extend this contract for up to two additional one (1) year periods to provide the services and/or materials at the unit prices bid, as appears in the best interest of the Town of Burlington.

15. All envelopes must be clearly marked indicating:

Contract Name Date of Opening Name of Bidder

16. Bids must be submitted on the required proposal form, and delivered to:

Engineering Division Town Hall Annex 25 Center Street Burlington, MA 01803


33

GENERAL CONDITIONS

ARTICLE 1

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 DEFINITIONS 1.11 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General, and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract, and all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations. A Modification is (1) a written amendment of the contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written interpretation issued by the Owner or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 12.3. The Contract Documents include Bidding Documents such as the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor’s Bid or portions of Addenda relating to any of these, or any other documents, specifically enumerated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1.1.1. 1.1.3 THE WORK The Work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction. 1.4 THE PROJECT The project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. 1.1.5 “OR EQUAL” The use of the words “Or Equal” following the name of any manufacturer, vendor or proprietary product shall be understood to mean that articles or materials may be substituted which, in the opinion of the Owner, are equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, design and performance to the articles or materials named or described and will perform adequately in providing a first-class facility. When submitting shop drawing information on articles or materials which are being proposed as substitutes for specified items, the Contractor shall clearly identify them as such. If the articles or materials are accepted as equal to those on which dimensions on the drawings are based, any dimensional variance from those shown and/or specified shall be shown on the shop drawings prepared by the Contractor, illustrating the manner in which conformity to dimensions and design is to be obtained. All such drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and the installation of the article shall not proceed without first obtaining said approval. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1


34

The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less than quadruplicate by the Owner and Contractor. 1.2.2 By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable there from as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance which such recognized meanings. 1.2.4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contract in dividing the Work among Sub contractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are and shall remain the Owner’s property. They are to be used only with respect to this Project and are not to be used on any other project without prior written consent of the Owner. With the exception of one contract set for each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner at the completion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of any reserved rights.

ARTICLE 2

2.1 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 2.1.1 The designated representative of the Owner or its Engineer will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Owner’s Representative or Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. 2.1.2 The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner may perform its functions under the Contract Documents. 2.1.3


35

Based on the Owner’s observations and an elevation of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Owner will determine the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts, approved by the Engineer. 2.1.4 The Owner will render information necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work within twenty (20) days of any request by the contractor or in accordance with any time limit agreed upon. 2.1.5 The Owner will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in his opinion, he considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. Any such rejection of work shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for maintaining protection of the Work and the Owner’s property. 2.1.6 The Owner or its Engineer will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Owner’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2.1.7 The Owner will prepare Change Orders in accordance with Article 12, and will have authority to order minor changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.4.1. 2.1.8 The Owner will conduct inspections to determine the date of Substantial Completion and Final Completion, will review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment.

ARTICLE 3 OWNER

3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Owner means the Owner or his authorized representative, which for this Project shall be the Superintendent of Public Works. 3.1.2 The Engineer for the Project shall be the Town of Burlington Engineering Department. 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 3.2.1


36

The Owner shall, at the time of execution of the Agreement and any subsequent Change Orders, certify for the Contractor that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. 3.2.2 The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the physical characteristics legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 3.2.3 Except as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.1. Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 3.2.4 Information or services under the Owner’s control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 3.2.5 The Owner will furnish the Contractor with (3) copies of all Drawings and Specifications and revisions issued during the progress of the Work; all additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 3.2.6 The Owner, through its designated agent or Engineer, shall forward all instructions directly to the Contractor. 3.2.7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors, Payments and Completion, and Insurance in Articles 6, 9 and 11 respectively. 3.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 3.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required by the owner or fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or if the Owner shall for any other reason so require, the Owner, by a written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated or until further written notice from the Owner; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. The Contractor shall resume the Work after such stoppage promptly upon written notice to do so form the Owner. If such stoppage is required through no fault of the Contractor, the Contract Time (and the dates for achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion) shall be extended by a period equal to the period of the stoppage, and the Contractor shall be compensated for its reasonable and justifiable cost incurred as a result of such stoppage. 3.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 3.4.1


37

If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have perform such work or cause such work to be performed and/or make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contract or are not sufficient to cover the amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR

4.1 DEFINITION 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized representative. 4.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Owner any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for any damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents which he discovers but shall be liable for damage to the extent he reasonable should have but failed to discover such errors, inconsistencies or omissions. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention which shall not be less than such state of skill and attention generally rendered by the contracting profession for projects similar to the Project in scope, difficulty and location. The Contractor shall maintain adequate supervisory personnel at the Premises during the performance of the Work. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. 4.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. This obligation shall also extend to the presence on the Site of suppliers of materials or equipment, their employees, contractors, and agents engaged in the work. 4.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Owner in its administration of the Contract, or by inspection tests of approvals required or performed under Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the Contractor.


38

4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and service necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 4.4.2 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him including all persons on the Site controlled directly or indirectly by the Contractor. 4.5 WARRANTY 4.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new and of recent manufacture unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Owner and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective and, promptly after written notification of non-conformance, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor with Work conforming to such requirements. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Paragraph 13.2. 4.6 TAXES 4.6.1 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes for the Work or portion thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. 4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.7.1 Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Supplemental General Conditions, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time the bids are received, and the same shall at all times be the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Project. 4.7.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with reproductions of all permits, licenses and receipts for any fees paid. The Owner represents that it has disclosed to the Contractor all orders and requirements known to the Owner of any public authority particular to this Contract. 4.7.3


39

If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance with applicable laws, statutes, codes and regulations in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Owner in writing, and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 4.7.4 If the Contractor performs any Work which he knows or should know is contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner, he shall assume full responsibility therefore and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. 4.8 SUPERINTENDENT 4.8.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site at all times during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. 4.9 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.9.1 The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s information an estimated progress schedule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. No work shall start without the Project schedule. The Contractor shall submit the project schedule five days prior to start the work. 4.10 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.10.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, and “As-Built” Drawings and Specifications in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.11 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.11.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 4.11.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 4.11.3


40

Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.11.4 The contractor shall review, approve and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. 4.11.5 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all material, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 4.11.6 The Contract shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Owner’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples or the Engineer’s approval of the same unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Owner or Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Owner or Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contract shall not be relieved from responsibility from errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Owner’s approval thereof. 4.11.7 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Owner or its Engineer on previous submittals. 4.11.8 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Owner or Engineer. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 4.12 USE OF SITE 4.12.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. 4.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.13.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. 4.13.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or


41

otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and

of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any

separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 4.14 CLEANING UP 4.14.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project in full compliance with all applicable laws and regulations as well as all his tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials and the Project shall be thoroughly cleaned and ready for immediate occupancy by the Owner. 4.14.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the completion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in Paragraph 3.4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 4.15 COMMUNICATIONS 4.15.1 The Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner through its Assistant Town Engineer, Division of Engineering, Town Hall Annex, 25 Center Street, Burlington, MA 01803. 4.16 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.16.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor believes or has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Owner, and thereafter the Owner insists on the use of the design, process or products specified. 4.17 INDEMNIFICATION 4.17.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Engineer and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney’s fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting there from, and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified there under. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 4.17. 4.17.2


42

In any and all claims against the Owner the Engineer or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 4.17 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workers’ or workmen’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.17.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this paragraph 4.17 shall not extend to the liability of the Owner, the Engineer, their agents or employees, arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) written directions or instructions given by the Owner, the Engineer, their agents or employees, provided they are the sole cause of the injury or damage.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him and the Owner from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. Claims under workers’ or workmen’s compensation, disability benefit and other similar employees benefit acts; 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of his employees; 3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees; 4. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; 5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting there from; 6. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents, or required by law, whichever is greater. 11.1.3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 4.18. 11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be canceled until at lease thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Certificates of renewal shall be delivered to the


43

Owner at least fifteen (15) days prior to the expiration date of any insurance policy. The Contractor shall not commence the Work until all insurance required here under shall have been obtained and approved by the Owner, and the Contractor shall not permit any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to commence work until all insurance required of them shall have been similarly obtained and approved. 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner, at its option, may purchase and maintain in such insurance as will protect it against claims which may arise from operations under the contract. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 The Owner may, at its option, purchase and/or maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. The insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of file and extended coverage and shall include “all risk” insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If the Owner does not intend to purchase or maintain such insurance for the full insurable value of entire Work, he shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of himself, his Subcontractors and the Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If not covered under the all risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect an d maintain property insurance on portions of the Work stored of the site or in transit when such portions of the work are to be included in an Application of Payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. This insurance does not cover any tools owned by mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging towers, and other property owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which s not included in the cost of the Work. 11.3.2 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, and (2) separate contractors, if any, and their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or any other property insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.3.2. 11.3.3 The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers. 11.3.4 The construction site may be occupied by the Owner during the Work. Insurance shall not lapse or be canceled on account of this occupancy. The insurance certificates required under this contract shall include this requirement. 11.4 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 11.4.1 The Owner, at his option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure him against loss of use of his property due to fire or other hazards, however caused.


44

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Specifications and measurement and payment information not contained herein shall meet the requirements of the Massachusetts Highway Department 1995 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges. All materials shall meet the requirements specified in the Massachusetts Highway Department 1995 Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges following Subsection of Division III, Materials:

1.01 Measurement of Quantities The quantities of the various items of work performed shall be determined for purposes of payment by the Engineer and by the Contract for purposes of the certification(s) of work performed that are generally required by law and specifically by the provisions hereof. Upon the completion of the work and before final payment is made the Engineer will make final measurements to determine the quantities of the various items of work performed, as the basis for final settlement. All measurements shall be made according to the United States customary units of measurement. The method of measurement and computations to be used in determination of quantities of material furnished and of work performed under the Contracts shall be selected by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, longitudinal measurements for area computations will be made horizontally, and no deductions will be made for individual fixtures having an area of one square foot or less. Unless otherwise specified, transverse measurements for area computations will be the neat dimensions shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer. Structures will be measured according to neat lines shown on the plans or as altered to fit field conditions. All items which are measured by the foot, such as pipe, culverts, guardrail, under drains, etc., will be measured parallel to the base or foundation upon which such structures are placed, unless otherwise shown on the plans. In computing volumes of excavation the average end area method or other methods acceptable to the Engineer will be used. When the term “gage” refers to the measurement of wire, it will mean the wire gage specified in the AASHTO Designation M 32. All materials that are specified for measurement by mass shall be weighed on standard scales furnished by and at the expense of the Contractor. Such scales shall be sealed at the expense of the Contractor as often as is necessary to insure their accuracy. A sworn weigher to be compensated by the Contractor shall weigh all materials required to be weighed as above provided. The weighing of such materials may be witnessed by the Engineer. If materials are shipped by rail or trucks, the car masses or quarry masses may be accepted, but scales shall be used as above, if so directed. Mass slips shall be provided for each shipment of material weighed. Each mass slip shall be signed by the sworn weigher. The mass slips shall be countersigned on delivery by the Engineer and no mass slip not so countersigned shall be included for payment under the Contract. When requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer in writing, material specified to be measured by the cubic foot may be weighed and such masses will be converted to cubic foot for payment purposes. Factors for conversion from mass measurement to volume measurement will be determined by the Engineer and shall be agreed to by the Contractor before such method of measurement of pay quantity is used. The term “lump sum” when used as a unit of payment will mean complete payment for the work described in the Contract.


45

When a complete structure or structural unit (in effect, “lump sum” work) is specified as the unit of measurement, the unit will be construed to include all necessary fittings and accessories. When standard manufactured items are specified such as fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, pipe conduit, etc., and these items are identified by gage, unit mass, section dimensions, etc., such identification will be considered to be nominal mass or dimensions. Unless more stringently controlled by tolerances in cited specifications, manufacturing tolerances established by the industries involved will be accepted. 1.02 Scope of Payment The Party of the First Part will pay and the Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment and for performing all work contemplated and embraced under the Contract, also for all loss or damage arising out of the nature of the work, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work until its final approval by the Party of the First Part, and for all risks of every description connected with the prosecution of the work, also for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of the said prosecution of the work in an acceptable manner according to the plans and specifications. The payment of any current estimate, or any retained percentage shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work or in no way or degree prejudice or affect the obligation of the Contractor, at his/her own cost and expense, to repair, correct, renew or replace any defects and imperfections in the construction of, or in the strength of, or quality of materials used in or about the construction of the work under Contract and its appurtenances, as well as all damages due or attributable to such defects; which defects, imperfections or damages shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damages and the Contractor shall be liable to the Party of the First Part for failure to correct the same as provided herein.


46

FOR CURRENT WAGE RATES LOG ONTO

www.mass.gov/dols/pw

Pine Haven Cemetery New Columbarium Garden Burlington, MA

01 1100 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. All Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of General Conditions and Special Conditions, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for

requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. This Section summarizes the Work of the Project, including the following:

1. Project Description 2. Time of Completion 3. Work under Other Contracts 4. Work Day 5. Work Sequence 6. Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Owner Occupancy 8. Pre-Ordered Products 9. Owner-Furnished Items 10. Contract Vendors 11. Pre-qualified Contractors 12. Miscellaneous Provisions, including Environmental Performance where

applicable. 1.03 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The Project consists of constructing columbarium walls, fountains, pavements and associated appurtenances and infrastructure. The work shall be as shown on the plans and as follows: 1. Site preparation and earthwork activities to establish subgrades to receive base

materials for footings, foundations and pavement bases. 2. Excavation, backfilling and rough grading associated with a host of construction

activities. 3. Concrete foundations, footings and bases. 4. Fountain assemblies, components and appurtenances. 5. Columbarium pre-fabricated niches and associated granite veneer, niche covers,

capstones and bases. 6. Pavement systems. 7. Landscaping, including planting soils, turf and plantings. 8. And associated work as described in the Contract Documents.

B. All Drawings and Specifications are prepared by Ray Dunetz Landscape Architecture, Inc.,

dated September 25, 2012.



C. Protection for the public, adjacent properties and cemetery property from damage during this contract is the responsibility of the Contractor for this project at all times.

1.04 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. Work required by the project shall commence immediately upon receipt of a Notice to Proceed.

B. Central to this construction project will be the timing of operations necessary to complete the

work of this Contract in an expedited manner in accordance with the following schedule.

C. The successful bidder shall obtain the Certificate of Substantial Completion as defined in the Contract Documents by July 1, 2013.

1.05 WORK DAY

A. The normal workday shall be 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday, excluding

Commonwealth granted Holidays. Permission must be requested and approved in writing to perform work outside the normal working hours or on a Commonwealth Holiday. Permission will be required for weekend work. Notify the Owner 5 working days in advance of expected weekend work. Time is of the essence to achieve completion on the aforementioned schedule and the Contractor shall work weekends and evenings during clement weather to achieve these stipulations.

B. As determined by the Owner, deviations in work hours are dependent upon availability of

Owner supervisory personnel. C. If the Contractor determines that work on this project must be performed during a time other

than normal working hours of the Town, costs for any premium time must be included in the Bid. No additional money will be allocated to the Contractor for evening or weekend work to meet the deadlines of this Contract.

1.06 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The Work shall be sequenced to meet the following goals and milestones: 1. Construction access will be allowed from a single point along the cemetery road,

except as approved by the Owner upon submission of compelling reasons. Maintain vehicular entrances free of debris, dirt and construction debris throughout the course of the Work.

2. Install erosion and sedimentation control prior to the start of any earthwork operations. Prevent sediment from leaving the site. Prevent sediment laden water from surface flow into adjacent protected resources. Prevent wind blown sediments.

3. Stockpile equipment and materials within the construction site or in designated mobilization area. Off site storage on Owner’s property except in designated and approved areas will be prohibited. Sequence of work shall be managed to keep stockpile and storage areas at a minimum area.

4. Schedule all inspections by the Owner’s Representatives to protect sequence of work.

5. Do no work within the Gas Company Right-of-Way.



6. Complete earthwork operations sufficiently in advance of spreading of planting soil to ensure turf establishment requirements of the Contract Documents.

7. Protect public health, safety and welfare.

1.07 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; do not block cemetery vehicles or pedestrian traffic. 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site

beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed unless approved by the Owner.

2. Keep construction entrance(s) serving the premises clear and available to the Owner at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

3. Burial of Waste Materials: Do not dispose of organic and hazardous material on site, either by burial or by burning.

4. Access through established burial plots shall not be prohibited. 1.08 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Provide field engineering services; establish grades, lines and levels, by use of recognized

engineering survey practices. Survey layout and control shall be performed by a Massachusetts Licensed Land Surveyor or Engineer.

B. AutoCAD documents will be made available to the Contractor by the Landscape

Architect for use in layout of all site improvement items. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not applicable) PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (Not applicable)

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


01 2300 - 1 ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 2300 ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL

A. Each bidder shall submit with his bid alternate prices stating the difference in price,

addition or deduction, from the lump sum base bid for substituting, omitting or changing the following materials or construction from that specified or shown on the Drawings.

B. The difference in prices shall include all omissions, additions, and adjustments of all

trades as may be necessary because of each change, substitution or omission. C. The Owner may accept ADD or DEDUCT alternates at time of bid for inclusion in the

general contract. Alternates not accepted at time of bid shall remain in full force and effect for Owner's acceptance during the full term of the Contract, or until construction operations have progressed to the point where the addition of the alternate will result in changes to the work completed or materials ordered by the Contractor.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1. Section 04 4000 – PROJECT STONE

1.03 ALTERNATES

A. ALTERNATE NO. 1: SUBSTITUTE ‘BARRE GRAY’ GRANITE FOR ‘GI-614’ GRANITE, AS PROVIDED BY GI STONE.

1. ‘Barre Gray’ Granite is available from Rock of Ages Quarry, 560 Graniteville

Road, Graniteville, VT 05654, 877-870-9057. 2. State the amount to be ADDED or DEDUCTED to the base bid for substituting

Barre Gray Granite for GI-614 Granite.

B. ALTERNATE NO. 2: SUBSTITUTE ‘RAINBOW’ GRANITE FOR ‘DAKOTA MAHOGANY’, AS PROVIDED BY GRANITES OF AMERICA.

1. ‘Rainbow’ Granite is available from Cold Spring Granite, Cold Spring,

Minnesota, 800-328-5040. 2. State the amount to be ADDED or DEDUCTED to the base bid for substituting

Rainbow Granite for Dakota Mahogany Granite.

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


01 3113 - 1 PROJECT COORDINATION

SECTION 01 3113 PROJECT COORDINATION



B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements

therein affecting the work of this trade.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for 1. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 2. General installation provisions. 3. Cleaning and protection.

B. Progress meetings, coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences are included in

Section 01 3119, PROJECT MEETINGS.

C. Requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule are included in Section 01 3300, SUBMITTALS.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other

components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results.

2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close-out activities.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 KEY PERSONNEL

A. POSITIONS 1. The Owner requires as a minimum, a Project Manager be assigned to this project.

The position shall be full-time individual, fully dedicated to the Project. The Project manager shall have not less than 5 years experience performing work of a similar nature to this project and in a comparable position to the position assigned on this project. Resume will be required prior to acceptance. Removal of the Project Manager from the project will require the Owner’s prior approval. Project Manager must remain on the project for the project’s duration unless approved in writing by the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all work with Owner’s Representatives.

B. Coordinate in field with affected trades for proper relationship to Work based on Project conditions.

C. Notify the Owner’s Representative of conflicts and other coordination issues requiring

resolutions prior to commencing construction in each affected area. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation.

Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work.

Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and structure movement. E. Recheck measurements, dimensions and grades before starting each installation. F. Install each component to ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed

construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.



3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder

of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the

construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessively high or low temperatures. 3. Air contamination or pollution. 4. Water or ice. 5. Solvents. 6. Chemicals. 7. Heavy traffic. 8. Soiling, staining and corrosion. 9. Rodent and insect infestation. 10. Combustion. 11. Contact between incompatible materials. 12. Destructive testing. 13. Excessive weathering. 14. Unprotected storage. 15. Improper shipping or handling. 16. Theft. 17. Vandalism. 18 Graffiti.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Project Coordination will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for project coordination but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.

4.02 BASIS OF PAYMENT

A. No separate payment for project coordination will be made under the terms of this

Contract. Payment for project coordination will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.



4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS NONE

END OF SECTION


01 3119 - 1 PROJECT MEETINGS

SECTION 01 3119 PROJECT MEETINGS




therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including but not limited to: 1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Pre-Installation Conference. 3. Progress Meetings.

B. Construction schedules are specified in Section 01 3300, SUBMITTALS.

1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The successful bidder shall attend a preconstruction conference and organizational meeting at the Owner offices, with the Owner’s Representative prior to any field work to review responsibilities and personnel assignments and to insure that Specifications, drawings and all conditions are understood to properly complete this Contract.

B. The meeting will be scheduled by the Owner’s Representative. C. Attendees: The Owner, Consultants, the Contractor and its Project Manager and other

concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

D. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as:

1. Construction schedule. 2. Critical Work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel and emergency phone numbers. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents and correspondence. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 8. Preparation of record documents. 9. Use of the premises, including dust and noise control, pedestrian and vehicular traffic

safety. 10. Parking. 11. Work and storage areas.



12. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 13. Safety procedures. 14. First aid. 15. Unacceptable behavior. 16. Security. 17. Construction debris and housekeeping. 18. Working hours.

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings at the Project site shall be held weekly, unless determined otherwise prior to start of construction. Notify the Owner and Owner’s Representative of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.

B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, each subcontractor, supplier or other

entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to progress.

C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the current status of the Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as: a. Interface requirements. b. Time. c. Sequences. d. Deliveries. e. Off-site fabrication problems. f. Access. g. Site utilization. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of Work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Housekeeping. l. Quality and Work standards. m. Change Orders. n. Documentation of information for payment requests.

D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date, the Owner’s Representative will distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.



1. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


A. Project Meetings will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for project meetings but they shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


A. No separate payment for project meetings will be made under the terms of this Contract.

Payment for project meetings will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


01 3300 - 1 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTALS





A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Submittal schedule. 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Daily Construction Reports. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit electronic copy of each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Submittals shall be directed to the Owner’s Representative for review and comment. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the

Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to withhold action on a

submittal which requires coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

4. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for re-submittals. a . Submit by email to the Owner’s Representative in electronic format. b. Allow 3 working days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing

must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Owner’s Representative will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

c. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.

d. Allow 3 working days for reprocessing each submittal.



e. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Owner’s Representative sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for

identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop

Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.

2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project Name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Contractor. d. Name of manufacturer. e. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Owner’s Representative using a transmittal form. 1.04 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Owner Representative. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and

the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare the product-listing schedule with information on each item tabulated

under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name. e. Installer's name and address. f. Identification of product as one of the following:

i) Product as specified ii) Proposed Substitution iii) Proposed Equal

3. Submit completed schedule within 15 days after Contract award or at the Preconstruction Meeting, whichever occurs first. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.



B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit

Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 24" x 36". 7. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken

in connection with construction. 8. Resubmit Shop Drawings as required by the Owner’s Representative.

1.06 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, and standard color charts. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data

includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Related Specification section number. b. Project name. c. Project number. d. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. e. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. f. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. g. Application of testing agency labels and seals. h. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. i. Notation of coordination requirements.

2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.

1.07 OWNER'S ACTION

A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Owner’s Representative will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Action Stamp: The Owner’s Representative will stamp each submittal with a uniform,

self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, to indicate the action taken.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).





A. Preparing, making, revising, and resubmitting submittals will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for submittals but they shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


A. No separate payment for submittals will be made under the terms of this Contract. Payment

for submittals will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


END OF SECTION


01 4500 - 1 QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01 4500 QUALITY CONTROL





A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control and quality control services.

B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports,

performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified

or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

D. Requirements of this Section:

1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures.

2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. The General Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and quality control services

specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the work of the Town.

2. Engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform the specified inspections, testing and quality control.

3. Qualification for Testing Service Agencies: Engage independent testing laboratories, which are pre-qualified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.



a. Each independent testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and testing laboratory 24 hours before the expected

time of testing. 1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required

inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the

Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction.

2. Additional Tests: The Contractor is responsible for employing and paying for additional tests if for the Contractor's convenience.

3. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities

necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that

require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of

samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for

materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.

C. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform

inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Owner’s Representative and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Owner’s Representative promptly of irregularities or

deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the

Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

D. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and

similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking

samples and similar activities.



E. Contractor is responsible for scheduling/coordinating all Owner’s Representative inspections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Owner’s Representative, in duplicate. 1. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include,

but not be limited to: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretations of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work

complies with Contract Document requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Owner’s Representative before proceeding. 1.06 REFERENCES

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents where no date is specified with standard.

B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Owner’s Representative before proceeding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired

construction. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


A. Quality Control will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for quality control but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


A. No separate payment for quality control will be made under the terms of this Contract.

Payment for quality control will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


END OF SECTION


01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS




requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. This Section specifies temporary facilities and controls for the following: 1. Safety 2. Protection Of Installed Work 3. Sanitary Facilities 4. Field Offices 5. Security 6. Cleaning During Construction 7. Noise Control 8. Maintenance Of Access 9. Temporary Power 10. Weather Protection 11. Temporary Water 12. Construction Fence

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1. General Conditions. 2. Supplementary Conditions. 3. SECTION 01 1100, SUMMARY OF WORK. 4. SECTION 01 7000, PROJECT CLOSEOUT.

1.04 TEMPORARY WATER

A. The Contractor may connect to Owner’s water supply in the vicinity of the Cemetery for temporary water needs during construction if hydrants are available and use is approved by the Owner. 1. Contractor shall meter all water use and reimburse the Owner for all costs for use

of water for temporary water needs including: maintenance of soil moisture during compaction in accordance with Sections 31 2213, 31 2300 and 31 2333; irrigation for turf establishment.

2. Do not obstruct the public’s access to the roadways through the cemetery.



3. Do not alter or obstruct surface drainage and collection systems for storm water. B. Any temporary pipe lines and connections from the water source, necessary for the use of

the General Contractor and his Subcontractors shall be installed, protected and maintained at the expense of the General Contractor.

C. The General Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of drinking water from approved

sources of acceptable quality for his employees and those of his Subcontractors. 1.05 WEATHER PROTECTION

A. It is not anticipated that the General Contractor will need temporary enclosures and heat to permit construction work.

1.06 TEMPORARY POWER

A. The Contractor shall provide electrical energy required for temporary light and power. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative to identify safety precautions, protection against vandalism, and specific needs of Contractor.

B. Provide all temporary feeders, wiring, circuits for equipment requiring high-amperage or

special voltage service, extension cords, sockets, motors and accessories required for work of this contract.

C. All temporary wiring installed by the Electrical Subcontractor shall be removed after it has

served its purpose. D. Use copper wire only.

1.07 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS

A. The Contractor shall maintain the functionality of temporary construction access sedimentation controls throughout the duration of the Contract.

B. Provide and maintain for the duration of this contract, all means of access into and within

the work area for vehicular traffic and authorized personnel. These means of access shall be construed to sustain the weight of equipment customarily engaged for use in construction projects of this type and magnitude. The Contractor shall, without additional compensation from the Owner, furnish labor and materials as may be required weekly to maintain these means of access in an acceptable condition as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

1.08 DUST CONTROL

A. Provide dust control throughout the duration of the project.



1.09 NOISE CONTROL

A. Section 01 5719, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, of this Contract for noise controls.

1.10 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Unless otherwise specified under the various Sections of the Specifications, the General

Contractor shall perform clean-up operations during construction as herein specified. B. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off-site. The

General Contractor shall bear all costs, including fees resulting from such disposal. C. Maintain project in accordance with all local, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and

Federal Regulatory Requirements.

D. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. E. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. F. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. G. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and

anti-pollution laws. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in

storm or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or wetlands.

H. Use only those materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will

not damage surfaces. I. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface

material to be cleaned. J. Execute cleaning to ensure that the site and adjacent properties are maintained free from

accumulations of waste materials and rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

K. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. L. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at

legal disposal areas off the construction site.

M. Handle material in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop or throw materials from heights.



N. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not damage surrounding surfaces.

1.11 SECURITY

A. Secure and protect the work limits from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft.

1.12 FIELD OFFICES

A. None required. Contractor shall maintain a full, hard copy set of Drawings, Specifications and all correspondence and pertinent project information at the Project Site at all times for review and consideration by the Owner’s Representative.

1.13 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide portable toilet for use by workmen and Owner’s Representative. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. At end of construction, remove from the site and return to vendor.

1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in

immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Contractor shall be responsible for temporary construction fencing and during construction

to protect his/her equipment and materials. The Owner will not be responsible for vandalism, theft, mayhem and naughty behavior by the public as a result of the Contractor’s failure to properly protect equipment and material.

D. Protect surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects. E. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas and from recently completed crypt construction

adjacent to the present project site. 1.15 SAFETY

A. The level of safety of the site and surrounding infrastructure shall not be diminished by the contractor's work in any occupied area adjacent to the construction site or in any other area which is affected by the presence of construction activity.

B. A safe work environment shall be maintained within the construction area throughout the

construction process.



C. EGRESS/ACCESS: All means of egress within the area of construction activity must be maintained as free and unobstructed. Personnel shall receive training if alternate exits must be designated.

D. FIRE PROTECTION: Protect the site, existing conditions, installed site improvements,

stored items and temporary facilities, materials and equipment from fire at all time. Provide fire suppression equipment on site sufficient to put our small fires which might start by accident or nefarious design.

E. Personnel shall be trained in the proper handling, storage, using and disposal of materials

on site. Owner’s Representative shall be notified when materials classified as hazardous are being delivered to the site.

F. WORKMENS SAFETY - Compliance with Public Law 91-596 "Occupational Safety

and Health Act of 1970" as amended (OSHA) with respect to all rules and regulations pertaining to construction.

G. Perform all work in accordance with all Federal and State Department of Labor and

Industries safety and health standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FENCING

A. CONSTRUCTION FENCE: Erect a 6' high galvanized chain link construction fence along the lines shown on the Drawing. Erect the fence immediately after receiving the Notice to Proceed and maintain the fence in a secure and sightly condition until instructed by the Landscape Architect to remove it or portions thereof. Second hand fencing materials meeting the requirements specified herein and in good condition may be used to provide the necessary barrier during construction on this project. Equivalent tubular sections, H-sections or roll formed sections may be substituted for pipe sections if acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Gate location shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative.

PART 3 – EXECUTION NOT USED PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


A. Item No. 01 5000.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS will be measured as a LUMP SUM, installed complete and in place including all labor, materials and equipment required for or incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work of this Section as described in the Summary of Work above.




A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by a single payment item. Such price shall constitute full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the Work as described in this Section.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS 01 5000.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION


01 5713 - 1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS

SECTION 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT

A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this trade.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section shall consist of providing all labor equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to provide and install erosion and sediment control, and related items as indicated on the Contract Documents and/or specified herein and includes but is not limited to the following:

Silt fence

B. The work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of Section 31 2319 DEWATERING.

C. This Section specifies equipment and materials for an erosion and sediment control program for minimizing erosion and siltation during the construction phase of the Project. The erosion and sediment control provisions detailed on the Contract Documents and specified herein are the minimum requirements for an erosion control program. The Contractor shall provide additional erosion and sediment control materials and methods as required to affect the erosion and siltation control principles specified herein.

1.03 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications:

1. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 2. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILL 3. Section 31 2319 DEWATERING 4. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD): Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, latest edition.



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall include:

1. List of proposed materials including manufacturer's product data. 2. Temporary sediment and erosion control plan.

B. Contractor shall submit the following written Certifications:

1. Filter fabric meets the requirements of this Specification 2. Contractor assumes all responsibility and liability for failure to control erosion

and sedimentation within the Limits of Work.

1.06 PERMITS, CODES, AND REGULATIONS

A. Comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the Town and State, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the Project site. All labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided by the Contractor without additional cost to the University.

B. Comply with the provisions of all applicable regulations of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts; Department of Environmental Protection (DEP); the Army Corps of Engineers (ACOE); and the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

1.07 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES

A. The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate means of sedimentation and erosion control during construction. Control measures shall prevent all wind and water caused erosion, siltation and sedimentation of stockpiled materials, wetlands, waterways, construction areas, adjacent areas and off-site areas. Work shall be accomplished adjacent to or in the following work areas:

1. Soil stockpiles and on-site storage and staging areas. 2. Cut and fill slopes and other stripped and graded areas. 3. Constructed and existing swales and ditches. 4. Adjacent to wetlands or other protected areas as shown on the Contract

Documents.

B. Means of protection as noted on the Contract Documents indicate the minimum provisions necessary. Additional means of protection shall be provided by the Contractor as required for continued or unforeseen erosion problems, at no additional expense to the Owner.

C. Regular weekly maintenance of all sediment control structures shall be provided to ensure intended purpose is accomplished. Sediment control measures shall be in working condition at the end of each day.



D. After significant rainfall, sediment control structures shall be inspected for integrity. Any and all damaged devices shall be repaired immediately.

E. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and construction phases:

1. Erosion control devices shall be installed prior to start of any and all clearing and grubbing operations and excavation work.

2. Clear only what is required for construction; wherever possible, as clearing and grading progresses, mass clearing and grading shall be avoided;

3. Contractor shall retain and protect natural vegetation to reduce the impact of wind and water caused erosion within the Work area.

4. Reestablish with permanent vegetation as soon as possible after construction is completed.

5. At the top of all slopes, divert runoff by use of earth berms or swales at the top of slopes.

6. The formation of large drainage areas and the concentrating of surface runoff flow patterns should be avoided wherever possible.

7. Size all control systems for future runoff: Contractor shall install drainage provisions that will accommodate increased runoff that results from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after disturbance.

8. Contractor shall retain all sediment on-site. 9. Develop and carry out a regular maintenance schedule for soil erosion and

sediment practices. 10. Contractor shall identify a single individual to be responsible for maintaining

erosion and sediment controls.

1.09 DEFINITIONS

A. Silt Fence: Temporary barriers of woven geotextile fabric used to intercept, reduce velocity and filter surface runoff from disturbed areas. Silt fences filter sediment from runoff so that deposition of transported sediment can occur. Silt fences shall be used to intercept sheet flow only. Do not use silt fences as velocity checks in ditches or swales, or placed where they will intercept concentrated flow.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE

A. Silt fence shall consist of the following:

1. Fence posts shall be a minimum of 36 inches long driven 16 inches minimum into ground. Wood posts shall be 1-1/2 inches X 1-1/2 inches (minimum) square cut, or 1 3/4" (minimum) diameter round and shall be of sound quality hardwood. Steel posts will be the standard T or U section weighing not less than 1.00 pound per linear foot.

2. Geotextile shall be fastened securely to each fence post with wire ties or staples at top and mid-section and shall meet the following requirements:



Tensile Strength 50 lbs/in (min.) Test: MSMT 509

Tensile Modulus 20 lbs/in (min.) Test: MSMT 509

Flow Rate 3 gal/ft2/minute (max.) Test: MSMT 322

Filtering Efficiency 75% (min.) Test: MSMT 322

3. Where ends of geotextile fabric come together, they shall be overlapped, folded

and stapled to prevent sediment bypass. 4. Silt Fence shall be inspected after each rainfall event and maintained when

bulges occur or when sediment accumulation reaches 50% of the fabric height. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall be responsible to control water born erosion and sedimentation on the construction site at all times. Contractor shall utilize silt fence, storm drain inlet protection, erosion dikes, temporary swales, and/or straw bales as necessary to meet the erosion control principles identified in this Section.

B. Contractor shall utilize silt fence and straw bales on the down slope side of all earthwork

operations to control erosion and sedimentation. Prevent flow along uphill side of silt fence and straw bales from creating erosion and system failure.

3.02 SILT FENCE

A. Silt fence shall be constructed and installed prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations or any earthwork operations.

B. Silt Fence Design Criteria:

1. Silt fence shall be used with caution in areas of rocky soils that may prevent trenching.

2. Silt fence shall be placed on the level: on or parallel to contours. Where erosion control systems are required to be placed on slope, cutting diagonally between contours, use erosion control devices other than silt fence.

3.03 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES

A. Erosion Control Devices

1. Sediment behind the erosion control device shall be checked twice each month and after each heavy rain. Silt shall be removed if greater than 6 inches deep.

2. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked twice each month or more frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced. Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effective condition.

3. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner that will not cause sediment nuisance elsewhere.



B. Removal of Erosion Control Devices: Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved or vegetated, at which time they shall be removed.

1. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored and in place until acceptance of stabilized, erosion and sediment controlled slope.

2. All stakes and silt fencing, and all other temporary erosion control devices and accessories shall be completely removed at completion of project and legally disposed of offsite at no additional cost to the University.

3. After erosion control devices are removed, areas disturbed by these devices shall be regraded and seeded and all adjacent areas repaired to a condition equal with the adjacent lawns or plantings.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


A. Removal and disposal of erosion and sedimentation control devices will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item 015713.01 SILT FENCE will be measured PER LINEAR FOOT, installed

complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion

4.02 PAYMENT ITEMS

01 5713.01 SILT FENCE LINEAR FEET

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


01 5719 - 1 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

SECTION 01 5719 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS



requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to control environmental pollution, including erosion and sedimentation.


A. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and shall be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 3. Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 4. Section 32 9200 PLANTING 5. Section 32 9220 LAWNS

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate and continuous control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures.

B. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Plans: In accordance with Section 01 5713.

C. Contractor shall submit the following written Certifications: Contractor assumes all

responsibility and liability for failure to control erosion and sedimentation within the Limits of Work.

1.05 DEFINITIONS OF POLLUTANTS

A. For the purpose of this specification, environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affects other species of importance to man; or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural and historical purposes. 1. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by wind

and/or runoff water.



2. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting from industrial, commercial and agricultural operations and from community activities.

3. Rubbish: A variety of combustible and non-combustible wastes such as, but not limited to, paper, plastic, metallic and plastic containers and cans, boxes, glass, crockery, metal lumber scrap, and bones.

4. Debris: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, and tree trimmings, ashes, and waste materials that result from construction or maintenance and repair work.

5. Chemical Waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkali’s, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals, and inorganic wastes.

6. Sanitary Wastes a. Sewage: That which is considered as domestic sanitary sewage. Human

and animal waste. b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking,

dispensing, and consumption of food and food by-products. 7. Exhaust fumes: flue gas which occurs as a result of combustion of natural gas,

gasoline, diesel, fuel oil, discharged from motorized vehicles, including trucks, automobiles, excavators, machinery, and general construction equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES

A. Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work under this contract during the duration of the contract. Confine activities to areas defined by the specifications and drawings. Any deviations must be approved in advance in writing by the Owner.

3.02 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES

A. Prior to construction, identify all land resources to be preserved within the work area. Do

not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms from any areas on the site unless shown on the Contract Documents or by prior approval from the Owner. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to trees for anchorage unless approved by the Owner, or dictated by extraordinary, extreme, or dangerous circumstances.

3.03 WORK AREA LIMITS

A. Prior to any construction, identify the areas that require work to be performed under this contract. Mark monuments to be retained prior to any construction. Convey to all personnel the purpose of marking all necessary objects.



3.04 TEMPORARY PROTECTION OF DISTURBED AREAS

A. In order to achieve Substantial Completion on the specified schedule the Contractor may need to perform earthwork and rough grading, topsoil amendment and spreading, and turf establishment work in a sequence that may leave the site open for an extended period of time during inclement weather. Protecting soil resources is an essential aspect of this Project and the Contractor shall perform all necessary operations and work to maintain existing and imported soil resources on site without undue loss of volume, quality, erosion, sedimentation or runoff.

B. In order to protect these essential soil resources the Contractor shall prevent wind and

water erosion and sedimentation by installing silt fencing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, and as determined in consultation with and as approved by the Owner.

C. Protection in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY

EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL of this Specification. 3.05 PROTECTION OF AIR RESOURCES

A. Keep construction activities under surveillance, management and control to minimize pollution of air resources. No burning will be permitted on the site. Keep activities, equipment, processes, and work operated or performed, in strict accordance with Federal emission and performance laws and standards. Maintain ambient air quality standards set by the Environmental Protection Agency, for those construction operations and activities specified. 1. Particulates: Dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-products from all

construction activities, processing, and preparation of materials, such as from asphalt batch plants, shall be controlled at all times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in progress.

2. Particulate Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, and all other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinkling with water is permissible to control particulates in the work area.

3. Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from equipment to Federal and State allowable limits.

4. Exhaust fumes: Control emissions of exhaust fumes. Turn off vehicle and equipment engines when not in use. Do not allow equipment to idle for more than 2 minutes.

3.06 NOISE CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall minimize construction related noise. Noise producing work shall be performed in less sensitive hours of the day, or as directed by the Owner. Maintain noise at or below the decibel levels and within the time periods specified.



1. Repetitive, high level impact noise will be permitted only between 7:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. weekdays, or as otherwise permitted by local ordinance, or as directed by the Owner. Construction is not permitted on weekends and holidays.

3.07 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED PROPERTY

A. When or where in the execution of the work under this contract, any direct or indirect damage injury is done to Owner property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall restore the damaged property to a condition equal to that existing before damage or injury was done. Repair, rebuild or otherwise restore property as directed by the Owner’s Representative or make good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner to the Owner.

3.08 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES

A. In accordance with Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT

CONTROLS, of this Specification. 3.09 FINAL CLEAN-UP

A. On completion of project and after removal of all debris, rubbish and temporary

construction, the construction area shall be left in a clean condition as approved by the Owner. Cleaning shall include legal off-campus disposal of all items and materials not required to be salvaged, as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from clearing, grubbing, logging, and general construction operations.



A. Item No. 015719 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS will be measured as a LUMP SUM, installed complete and in place including all labor, materials and equipment required for or incidental to the satisfactory protection of environmental resources, protection of land, water and air resources, protection of disturbed areas, noise control, restoration of damaged property and final clean-up.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by a single payment item. Such price

shall constitute full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the Work as described in this Section.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS 01 5719.01 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION


01 6600 - 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 01 6600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT





A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project, including: 1. Product list schedules. 2. Substitution requests. 3. Product selection. 4. Product delivery, storage and handling.

B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under

Section "Submittals." 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories" and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry.

B. Products: Items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project

or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

C. Materials: Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or

otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

D. Equipment: A product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

Pine Haven Cemetery June 2012 New Columbarium Garden Burlington, MA

01 6600-2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

E. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Town. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract

Documents. 3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and

orders issued by governing authorities. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Workmanship: 1. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive specified tolerances or

requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. 2. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. 3. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items

that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses.

3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

6. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

7. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

B. All deliveries of material, equipment, etc., shall be made to the Contractor and accepted only

by him and only during working hours. Town personnel will not receive or accept any material or equipment, etc., at any time.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, and finish, safety guards and

other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and

governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where three or more products or

manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the

term "or equal," or "or approved equal" Contractor shall comply with the provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

2. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product

literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only

require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.

6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Town's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches

satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements.

7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase,



select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Owner will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing materials and equipment will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for this work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all part 4’s of these Specifications.


A. No separate measurement will be made for this work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all part 4’s of these Specifications.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION


01 7000 - 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

SECTION 01 7000 PROJECT CLOSEOUT





A . This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties.

B. Closeout procedures

1. Final cleaning.

C. Additional closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included under Part 3 – Execution, herein.

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. In accordance with General Conditions and Special Conditions.

1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. In accordance with General Conditions and Special Conditions.

1.05 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration

and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Owner's reference during normal working hours.

B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a set of as-built drawings for work covered under

these Specifications. The drawings shall be prepared upon reproducible copies of the Contract Documents supplied by the Owner. As-built drawings shall record all changes made during construction with respect to materials, layout, grading contours and spot elevations, all as compared to the original Contract Drawings.



C. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between

variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract

Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover

sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. 5. Upon completion of the Work, submit record sets to the Owner Representative for

transfer of data to the original tracings. D. The following information shall be indicated on the Record Drawings:

1. Record all changes, including change orders, in the location, size, number and type both horizontally and vertically of all elements of the project that deviate from those indicated on all the Contract Drawings.

2. The location of all underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements, both horizontally and vertically at 10 foot intervals and at all changes of direction.

E. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including

addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Owner’s

Representative for the Owner's records. F. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these

documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the

Owner’s Representative for the Owner's records.

G. Record Sample Submitted: Discard off site in a legal manner all samples not incorporated into the work per individual specification sections.



H. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Owner for the Owner's records.

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Submit three separately bound sets of manuals to the Owner for approval prior to acceptance by the Owner. Organize operating and maintenance data for all major mechanical and electric equipment into suitable sets of manageable size. These shall be typewritten or photocopied, 8-1/2" x 11" sheets describing the equipment and detailing the operation, including function of individual parts and proper sequencing. Manufacturers’ bulletins or catalogues will be acceptable but shall be amplified as required to provide full instruction. Manufacturers' specific operating and servicing manuals are acceptable, provided they fully cover the requirements and any additional data is appended. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Installed model, size, rating, operation and other applicable information shall be

clearly identified. 2. Location of equipment on site. 3. Repair and spare parts list. 4. Copies of warranties. 5. Complete wiring and control diagrams. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Service and repair schedules. 8. Shop Drawings and Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide experienced personnel for as long a period as necessary as determined by the Owner. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Identification systems. 6. Control sequences.



7. Cleaning. 8. Warranties and bonds. 9. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. Unless otherwise specified under the various sections of the specifications, the General

Contractor shall perform final cleaning operations as herein specified prior to final inspection. B. Maintain project site free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish, caused by

operations. At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and clean all sight-exposed surfaces; leave project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Cleaning shall include all surfaces, interior and exterior in which the General Contractor has

had access whether existing or new. D. Refer to Sections of the Specifications for cleaning of specific products or work. E. Use only those cleaning materials and methods that are recommended by the manufacturer of

surface material to be cleaned. F. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning operations. G. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. H. Prior to final completion, the General Contractor shall conduct an inspection of exterior

surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing project closeout will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for this work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


A. No separate payment for the Work of this Section will be made under the terms of this

Contract. Payment for said Work will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.



4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


01 7123 - 1 FIELD ENGINEERING

SECTION 01 7123 FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.


1.02 SUMMARY

A . General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field-

engineering services, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Verification of grades and contours shown on the existing conditions and grading

plans. Contractor shall report discrepancies in the existing conditions survey to the Owner’s Representative prior to the commencement of earthwork activities.

2. Provide all miscellaneous land survey Work necessary to install the work of this Contract.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor will identify existing control points for layout of critical components. B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and

existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to

data established by survey control points.



1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

D. Existing utilities and equipment: The existence and location of underground and other

utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework Contractor shall investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.

3.02 PERFORMANCE

A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels as needed to properly locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels

provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb.

B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey Work. Make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Owner’s

Representative when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for

grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.

D. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing

structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.



A. Administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering work will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for this work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.







END OF SECTION

Blank Page


01 7830 - 1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

SECTION 01 7830 WARRANTIES AND BONDS





1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of

workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 017000, Project Closeout. 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations

that are specified to be warranted are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-1 through -33.

4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to the Town are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product

warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Product Warranties: Preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Town.

B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Town.

1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been

corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement.



The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,

replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Town has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied

warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to

limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special

warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

F. Schedule: Provide warranties and bonds on products and installations as specified in the

project specifications. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the Owner prior to the date certified for Substantial

Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the

Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor

and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Owner’s Representative for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -33 for specific content

requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.

C. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate

warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed



description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.

2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS”, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.

3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

1.06 FORM OF GUARANTEE/WARRANTIES

A. The General Contractor will furnish to the Owner the foregoing documents in the

following manner: 1. Address to: Superintendent, Department of Public Works, Town of Burlington,

MA, Town Hall Annex, 25 Center Street, Burlington, MA 01803. Utilize US Postal Service or hand deliver.

2. All guarantees/warranties shall reference the project name and number as indicated in the Contract Documents.

3. All required guarantees/warranties will be by the respective company made out to the Town of Burlington.

4. All guarantees/warranties supplied by subcontractors or manufacturers shall be countersigned by the General Contractor.

B. All work shall be covered by the industry standard one (1) year guarantee except as

follows. The Contractor shall visit the project site at 11 months into the guarantee period to determine the scope of any required guarantee work. The Contractor shall contact the Owner’s Representative prior to this visit so that the Owner’s Representative may attend.

C. The functioning of the fountain system, including all plumbing, drains and water service

shall be guaranteed for no less than two (2) years. The Contractor shall visit the project site 23 months into the guarantee period to determine the scope of any required guarantee work. The Contractor shall contact the Owner’s Representative prior to this visit so that the Owner’s Representative may attend.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT


A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing warranties and bonds will be considered incidental to the Work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for this work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.




A. No separate payment for the work of this Section will be made under the terms of this Contract. Payment for said work will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.


END OF SECTION


01 8900 - 1 SITE CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 8900 SITE CONSTRUCTION

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS




requirements therein affecting the work of this trade.

1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide services of licensed Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor to establish location, layout

and elevations of all site improvements and features to be supplied, built and otherwise installed on this Project.


A. The requirements of this Section 01 8900 shall apply to all Sections of this Specification.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Division of Professional Licensure, Office of Consumer Affairs and Business Regulation, Commonwealth of Massachusetts.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name and contact information for Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor, including

Massachusetts License Number, Type of License, Expiration Date, contact address and telephone number.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall select and the Owner’s Representative shall approve a licensed Civil

Engineer or Land Surveyor to layout and establish the elevations of all site improvements and features. Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor shall be paid directly by the Contractor.


A. Unless specifically waved by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall employ

and pay all costs for a Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor who is licensed by the Division of Professional Licensure, Office of Consumer Affairs and Business Regulation, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, to locate and lay out all site improvements and features from AutoCAD files of the Contract Drawings provided by the Owner’s Representative.



B. Consulting Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor shall establish all grades in accordance with the Drawings and as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site prior to the start of

excavation and filling.

1. Before commencing work of this Contract, meet with the Owner Representative to review layout and grading issues with the consulting Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor. Review layout procedures and responsibilities. Notify participants at least three working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.

1.08 LAYOUT AND GRADES

A. Benchmarks: The Contractor shall create, maintain and/or reestablish benchmarks and survey monuments necessary for the work of these Contract Documents as are found to exist on the site to provide a base reference for the construction. Replace any benchmarks which may become destroyed or disturbed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Electronic files of all AutoCAD Drawings will be made available to the Contractor by the

Owner’s Representative prior to the start of work. Contractor shall utilize these AutoCAD files to locate all site improvements and features installed as Work of this Contract. Coordinate location of all site improvements with existing above and below grade features to remain. The Contractor shall report conflicts and discrepancies between new site improvements and existing conditions immediately to the Owner’s Representative.

3.02 LAYOUT

A. Limit of Work is noted on the Drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for locating all site improvements and features to avoid damage to operations and existing conditions inside the Limit of Work designated to remain and to avoid damage to operations and existing conditions outside the Limit of Work. Restore to original conditions all existing conditions designed to be protected and retained that are damaged during the course of construction. Restoration shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Owner’s Representative shall determine restoration standards and quality.

B. Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor shall locate all site improvements and features in

relation and proportion to one another and to existing conditions, site boundaries and legal bounds as shown on the AutoCAD files. Deviation from distances, angles, offsets and dimensions established by the AutoCAD files shall not be tolerated and any deviations found on the site shall be rectified and corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.03 GRADES AND ELEVATIONS

A. Spot elevations shall govern over proposed contours. Where not otherwise indicated,

project site areas shall be given uniform slopes between points for which finished grades are indicated or between such points and existing established grades. In the event the Drawings do not provide for positive drainage in all locations, notify the Owner’s Representative immediately.

B. Establish and maintain suitable stakes over all areas to be graded as directed, specified or

required. Maintain sufficient reference points at all times during construction to properly perform the contract installation.

3.04 SUPPORT OF SUB-CONTRACTORS

A. Under circumstances where sub-contractor trades require dimensional support, the

Contractor shall direct the Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor to provide said support based on AutoCAD drawing files. Consult with the Owner’s Representative only when the provided electronic files do not adequately allow for the Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor to determine the needed dimensions.



A. Administrative and procedural requirements governing site construction performance requirements will be considered incidental to the Work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for this Work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in all Part 4’s of these Specifications.




4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


03 3000 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE



Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.



1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete the cast-in-

place concrete work which includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Cast-in-place concrete as used in the following:

a. Concrete foundations for Columbarium Walls and Monument. b. Concrete base for Fountain Basin. c. Concrete foundation for Planter, Flush and Raised Granite Curbs. d. Concrete base for Bench. e. Concrete base for Fountain Vault. f. Furnishing and installing inserts for steel member connections, flashing

reglets, and similar items in conjunction with concrete work. g. Installation of items furnished by other sections (such as waterstops,

anchors, sleeves, bolts and plates) as required to be cast into concrete. h. Make provisions in forms for proper location and installation of pipe

sleeves, keys, chases, sumps, bolts, anchors, inserts, and similar items, as required by other trades. Notify appropriate trades when items noted are ready for installation.

i. Unless specifically excluded, furnishing and installation of any other items of cast-in-place concrete work indicated on Contract Documents, specified, or obviously needed to make work of this Section complete.

2. Forms 3. Form ties 4. Reinforcing steel and mesh 5. Control joints 6. Expansion joints


A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the

Specifications: 1. Section 01 4500 QUALITY CONTROL 2. Division 31 Sections related to EARTHWORK items 3. Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE 4. Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY 5. Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS



1.04 REFERENCES

A. Except as noted, work shall conform to the latest edition of the following codes specifications and standards: 1. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

M153 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

M182 Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats

M194 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials: A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement A108 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, cold-Finished,

Standard Quality A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, For

Concrete Reinforcement A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes A496 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete

Reinforcement A497 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for

Concrete Reinforcement A510 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and

Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel bars for

Concrete Reinforcement C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

in the Field C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens C40 Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for

Concrete C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and

Sawed Beams of Concrete C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete C109 Standard Test method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C496 Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens



C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete

C1064 Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete

E1549 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover

E488 Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements

3. ACI American Concrete Institute:

ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 304 Handling Concrete ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306.1 Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete

Structures ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual

4. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: Reinforced Concrete - A Manual of Standard Practice Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars

5. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, latest edition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, curing compounds, rebar mechanical splicers, and other items if requested by the Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall review all Contract Documents for all items that are required to be embedded in concrete, and shall make necessary provisions as required so that reinforcing steel will not interfere with the placement of such embedded items.

B. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing, fabricating, bending, and placing of all

concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Show reinforcing in elevation for columbarium wall foundations, show reinforcing in plan for basin slabs, show all reinforcing splices and labs, show dowels with concrete element to be cast first, and show details where interference of reinforcing may occur.

C. Samples of materials as requested by the Owner’s Representative, including names,

sources, and descriptions, as follows: 1. Rebar mechanical splicers 2. Rebar supports, each type 3. Expansion bolts, each type 4. Cast-in inserts, each type 5. Form ties, each type



D. Name and address of Testing Laboratory for approval by Owner’s Representative. E. Submit 2 copies of laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs tests as

specified. F. If conveying concrete by pump is requested by the Contractor, submit related data

regarding concrete materials, pumping device, and methods to Owner’s Representative for approval 3 weeks before such method is proposed for use.

G. Corrective Work: submit drawings showing details of any proposed corrective work,

prior to performing corrective work. H. Concrete Curing and Protection: Submit to Owner’s Representative detailed methods

proposed for curing and protecting concrete in normal, cold and hot conditions. I. Mill Test Certification: Submit to Owner’s Representative, prior to delivery of

reinforcing steel or concrete to the job site, certified mill test reports of reinforcing steel and cement, (including names and locations of mills and shops, and analyses of chemical and physical properties), properly correlated to concrete to be used in this Project. This submittal is for information and file record.

J. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with

specification requirements. K. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing materials called for in

Contract Documents, even though these materials may have been omitted from approved shop drawings.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Contractor shall select and the Owner’s Representative shall approve a qualified

independent testing agency to perform on-site observation and testing during the construction operations. Independent testing agency shall be paid directly by the Contractor. Owner will not reimburse Contractor for testing services or field observation.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall include the

following, as directed by the Owner’s Representative. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply

with ASTM C94. a. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of discharge for each concrete

truck load and one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

b. Air Content: ASTM Cl73. volumetric method for light weight or normal weight concrete: ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength specimens.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees Fahrenheit and below, when 80 degrees Fahrenheit and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.



d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31: one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

e. Compressive Strength Tests ASTM C39; one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cubic yards more than the first 25 cubic yards of each concrete class placed in any one day, one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete

4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 pounds per square inch.

C. Testing: All personnel and laboratories testing concrete shall be licensed by the

Commonwealth of Massachusetts. D. Forms and Reinforcing: The Contractor shall verify that forms and reinforcing steel have

been installed in accordance with the specified requirements. E. Test results shall be reported in writing to the Owner’s Representative and ready-mix

producer within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. G. Additional Tests: The testing agency shall make additional tests of in-place concrete

when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as directed

H. In the event the compressive strength of the cylinders, when tested, is below the specified

minimum, the Owner’s Representative may require test cores of the hardened structure to be taken by the Testing Laboratory in accordance with ASTM C42. If such test indicates that the core specimen is below the required strength, the concrete in question shall be removed and replaced without cost to the Owner. Any other work damaged as a result of this concrete removal shall be replaced with new materials to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. The cost of coring will be deducted from the contract amount. Where core cylinders have been taken by the Testing



Laboratory and the concrete proves to be satisfactory, core holes shall be filled in a manner satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.

I. The Contractor shall coordinate the date and location of tests with the Owner’s

Representative before any concrete work is started. J. The testing laboratory's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual

work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing laboratory, any inspection wherever conducted, nor any observations and testing performed by the testing laboratory shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work, nor relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements, nor shall inspector's acceptance of material or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the Owner’s Representative if defects are discovered.

K. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to modify or waive testing laboratory

services.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reinforcing steel shall be transported to the site, stored, and covered in a manner which

will ensure that no damage shall occur to it from moisture, dirt, grease, or any other cause that might impair bond to concrete or chip protective epoxy coating. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from weather, oil, earth, and damage from trucking or other construction operations. A sufficient supply of approved reinforcing steel shall be stored on the site at all times to ensure that there will be no delay of the work. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, form oil, concrete splatter and other extraneous coating at the time it is embedded in the concrete.

B. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or

intrusion of foreign matter. Any materials which have deteriorated, or which have been damaged, shall not be used for concrete.

C. Identification of steel reinforcing shall be maintained after bundles are broken.

1.08 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all conditions affecting work under

this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents, or obvious from observations from the site.

B. Examine Contract Documents, surveys, measurements and dimensions during the bid

period. Any discrepancies, errors or omissions shall be brought to the attention of the Owner’s Representative prior to submission of a bid.



1.09 USE OF SITE A. The Contractor shall conduct his operations so as to interfere as little as possible with the

use ordinarily made of roads or other facilities near enough to the work to be affected thereby.

1.10 PERMITS AND CODES

A. Comply with the local, state and federal rules, regulations, laws and ordinances, and of all

other authorities having jurisdiction. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements of the Contract and the following: 1. Within 7 days of receiving Notice to Proceed, conduct a meeting to review

detailed requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory concrete operations. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule for procedures for materials inspection, testing and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Owner. b. Owner’s Consultant. c. Contractor’s Superintendent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement shall be ASTM C150, Type I or II, free from water-soluble salts or alkalies which will cause efflorescence on exposed surfaces. Only one brand of cement shall be used on the project.

B. Fly Ash shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618, Type C. Fly ash shall not

exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight. C. Aggregates:

1. Fine Aggregates for Concrete: Shall be natural sand consisting of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, conforming to ASTM C33. Organic content shall be determined according to ASTM C33. Organic content shall be determined according to ASTM C40, and supernatant liquid above test sample shall show color no darker than reference standard color solution prepared at the same time. Allow no frozen or partially frozen aggregate in the mix.

2. Coarse Aggregate for Concrete: Use crushed stone or gravel from approved source conforming to ASTM C33. Maximum size aggregate shall be 0.75 inch.



D. Admixtures: 1. Calcium chloride, triocynanates, and admixtures containing more than 0.05

percent chloride ions are not permitted. 2. Air-entraining Agent shall conform to ASTM C260 for Air-entraining

Admixtures for Concrete. Air-entraining agent must be by the same manufacturer as water-reducing agent.

3. Water Reducing Agent shall conform to ASTM C494 Type A for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. Water-reducing agent must be by the same manufacturer as air-entraining agent.

4. High-range water reducing admixture (Super Plasticizer) shall conform to ASTM C494, type For Type G.

5. Water-reducing set retarders shall conform to ASTM C494 Type D and may be used when ambient temperatures exceed 80 degrees Fahrenheit. Do not use without specific approval of the Owner’s Representative.

6. Accelerator admixture shall be a non-chloride and non-corrosive accelerator conforming to ASTM C494 Type C and may be used when temperatures are below 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Do not use without specific approval of the Owner’s Representative.

7. Corrosion inhibitor admixture shall be a calcium nitrite based inhibitor complying with AASHTO M194 type C, such as W.R. Grace DCI Corrosion Inhibitor” or approved equal, applied at the rate of 4.0 gallons per cubic yard of concrete.

E. Water from approved source shall be potable, clean, and free of oils, salt, alkali, organic

matter and other deleterious materials detrimental to concrete. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars shall be new, deformed billet steel bars, conforming to ASTM A615,

Grade 60 deformed. B. Welded wire mesh shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A185. Mesh shall be

galvanized. Furnish welded wire mesh in flat sheets, not rolls. C. Stainless steel dowels and stainless steel rods shall conform to ASTM A276, and shall be

sized as noted on the Contract Documents.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: AISI Type 304 stainless steel plain round bars. Saw cut bars as required, free from burrs or out of round ends. Coat bars in accordance with AASHTO M254.

E. Dowel Caps: plastic having a closed end with a stop to hold the end of the sleeve at a

minimum distance of 1 inch from the end of the dowel bar.

F. Reinforcement accessories, consisting of spacers, chairs, ties, and similar items shall be provided as required for spacing, assembling, and supporting reinforcement in place. All accessories shall be dielectric coated steel or approved plastic accessories, conforming to the applicable requirements of the CRSI Standards specified in this Section. 1. At all other reinforcement: For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or

horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. Tie wire shall



be annealed wire of sufficient strength for intended purpose but not less than 18 gauge. Supports touching interior formed surfaces exposed to view shall be CRSI Class 1, plastic protected, or CRSI Class 2, stainless steel.

G. Tie wire for reinforcement shall be 16-gauge or heavier dielectric coated steel or

approved plastic accessories, conforming to the applicable requirements of ASTM A82.

2.03 FORMWORK, COATINGS AND ACCESSORIES A Formwork:

1. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable materials. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

B. Form Coatings shall be non-grain raising and non-staining type that will not leave

residual matter on surface of concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of subsequent application of other material applied to concrete surface. Agent shall be chemically active, shall minimize surface voids, leave no residual on concrete, produce a smooth, architectural concrete surface, and shall be specifically formulated for application to the forms used by the Contractor. Coating containing mineral oils or the non-drying ingredients will not be permitted. Provide form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

C. Form Ties and Spreaders: Standard metal form clamp assemble and plastic cone, factory-

fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1.0 inch of concrete face. They shall be designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Inner tie rod shall be left in concrete when forms are removed. No wire ties or wood spreaders will be per-mitted. Use 0.5 inch x 1.0 inch plastic cones for sinkages.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Grout shall be a non-staining, non-shrink cement grout conforming to C827 and Army

Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-621. Grout shall contain no metals. Grout shall be one of the following or an approved equal: 1. Five Star Grout

U.S. Grout Corporation 401 Stillson Road Fairfield, CT 06430

2. Sika Grout 212 Sika Corporation 201 Polito Avenue Lyndhurst, NJ 07071

3. Harris Construction Grout A.H. Harris & Sons Inc. 10 West Mill Street Medfield, MA 02052

B. Concrete Curing Membranes conforming to ASTM C171:

1. Polyethylene film



2. Polyethylene-coated burlap 3. Waterproof paper

C. Absorptive cover shall be burlap cloth made from jute or kenat, weighing approximately

9 ounces per square yard complying with AASHTO M182, Class 2. D. Expansion bolts shall be hot-dipped galvanized bolts conforming to Federal Spec. FF-S-

325, Group II, type 4, Class 1. Allowable pullout and shear values shall be based on ASTM E488 spacings. Use one of the following or equivalent approved by the Owner’s Representative: 1. “Molly Parabolt”, USM Corporation 2. “Kwikbolt”, Hilti Incorporated 3. “Red head Wedge Anchor”, ITT Philips Drill Division.

E. Base material shall be as specified, provided, installed and paid for under Section 31

0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK of this Specification. 2.05 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the requirements and applicable provisions of

Section M4 of the Standard Specification. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 4,000 pounds per square inch. Slump of concrete shall be 3 inches. 1. Maximum allowable net water content is the total water in the mix at the time of

mixing, including free water on aggregate. 2. Consider any fly ash as part of the cement content for purposes of establishing

cement factor and w/c ratio. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.

3. Use maximum water-cement equal to 0.45 for concrete subject to freezing and thawing, repeated surface wetting or deicers.

B. Normal weight concrete shall have an air dry weight not exceeding 150 pounds per cubic

foot. C. Air-entraining and water-reducing agents shall be used in all concrete in strict accordance

with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Total air-entrained in freshly mixed concrete shall be 5 percent plus or minus 1.0 percent of volume of concrete.

D. The proportions of aggregate to cement for any concrete shall be such as to produce a

mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement, but without permitting the materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface.

E. Pre-mix admixtures in solution form and dispense as recommended by the manufacturer.

Include the water in the solution in the design water content of the mixtures. F. Maximum water soluble chloride ion (C1-) in concrete: 0.10 percent by weight of

cement.



2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer)

in concrete, as required by site conditions and approved by the Owner’s Representative, for placement and workability.

B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50

degrees Fahrenheit. C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, and concrete with water-

cement ratios below 0.45. D. Use air-entraining admixture in concrete exposes to exterior environment and in

accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. See ACI 301 Table 3.4.1 for required air content except that maximum for all sizes of aggregate shall be 6 percent in exterior environments. Tolerance at point of placement shall be plus or minus one percent.

E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance

with manufacturer’s directions. 2.07 CONCRETE MIXING AND DELIVERY

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: use ready-mixed concrete produced by plant acceptable to the

Owner’s Representative. Hand or site mixing shall not be done. Batch constituents, including admixtures, at central plant. Admixtures shall be premixed in solution form and dispensed as recommended by manufacturer. Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degree Fahrenheit and 90 degree Fahrenheit,

reduce mixing and delivery time from 90 minutes to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees Fahrenheit, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2. For normal weight concrete, water may be added at the site only to makeup water withheld at the plant. Batching plant shall document at the driver’s delivery ticket any water withheld at the plant. When water has not been withheld and slump is too low for proper handling of concrete, use high-range water reducing admixture to bring slump within specified range.

B. Transport ready-mixed concrete to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded

not in excess of rated capacities. Discharge at site within one and one-half hours after cement was first introduced into mix. Do not use concrete with a temperature greater than 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Central mixed concrete shall be plant-mixed a minimum of five minutes. Agitation shall begin immediately after premixed concrete is placed in truck and shall continue without interruption until discharged. Transit-mixed concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for at least ten minutes immediately after charging truck followed by agitation without interruption until discharged.

C. Do not retemper (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregates, or water)

concrete that has partially hardened.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral,

static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Forms shall be so braced and tied together that the movement of men, equipment, materials, or placing and vibrating the concrete will not throw them out of line or position. Securely brace and shore forms, making them sufficiently tight, to prevent the leakage of concrete. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following A.C.I. 347 limits. 1. Provide Class B tolerances for all formed concrete surfaces.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate

alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming recesses and the like for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of

formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate

work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

F. Openings for Items Passing through Concrete: Contractor shall establish exact locations,

sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. Contractor shall be held responsible for proper coordination of all work of this nature in order that there will be no unnecessary cutting and patching of concrete. Any cutting and repairing to concrete required as a result of failure to provide for such openings shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner’s Representative.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive

concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.



3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Place reinforcing steel in accordance with the Contract Documents and

approved Shop Drawings. Comply with CRSI’s Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars, for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports.

1. Install reinforcement accurately and secured against movement, particularly

under the weight of workmen, the placement of concrete and vibration work. 2. Reinforcing Steel Supports: Bars shall be supported on approved plastic or

dielectric-coated metal chairs or spacers, accurately placed and securely fastened to forms or steel reinforcement in place. Additional bars shall be supplied, whether specifically shown on the Contract Documents or not, where necessary to securely fasten reinforcement in place. Support legs of accessories in forms without embedding in form surface. Spacing of chairs and accessories shall conform to CRSI's "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Support". Hooping and stirrups shall be accurately spaced and wired to the reinforcement. No wood will be permitted inside forms. Lifting of welded wire fabric into proper position while concrete is being poured rather than supporting fabric on chairs will not be permitted.

3. Placing and Tieing: All reinforcement shall be set in place, spaced, and rigidly and securely tied or wired with tie wire at all splices and at all crossing points and intersections in the positions shown, or as directed. Re-bending of bars on the job to accommodate the job to accommodate existing conditions will not be permitted without the written approval of the Owner’s Representative. Point ends of wire ties away from forms.

4. Spacing: Minimum center to center distance between parallel bars shall be in accordance with the details on the Contract Documents, or, where not shown, the clear spacing shall be 2 times the bar diameter but in no case less than 1.5 inches (38 mm) or less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size aggregate.

5. Splices shall be in accordance with the following: a. Maximum 50 percent of steel spliced occurring within lap length. b. Splice lengths: #6 bars and smaller - 30 bar diameter.

6. Protective Concrete Covering a. Except where shown otherwise on Contract Documents, the minimum

concrete coverage for steel reinforcement shall conform with the applicable revisions of the "Codes and Standards" previously specified in this Section. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

7. Dowels and Sleeves a. Install expansion dowels and sleeves perpendicular to and across

expansion joints in concrete at 2 feet 0 inches on center minimum, or as shown on the Contract Documents. Core drill existing concrete where required and grout non-sleeved end of dowel in place. After grout has set, bend dowel and sleeve as required to level before pouring new concrete.



B. Do not bend, tack weld or cut reinforcement in field in any manner other than as shown on Contract Documents unless specific approval for each case is given by Owner’s Representative.

C. Continue reinforcement through construction joints unless otherwise indicated on

Contract Documents. D. Splice reinforcement only in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents or as

otherwise specifically approved by Owner’s Representative. Do not splice reinforcement at points of maximum stress unless shown on the Contract Documents.

E. Clean uncoated reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale materials that reduce or destroy

bond with concrete. Paint reinforcement expected to be exposed to weather for a considerable length of time with a heavy coat of cement grout. Protect stored materials so as not to bend or distort bars in any way. Bars that become damaged will be rejected.

F. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

I. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces by 12

inches and as indicated and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

K. Before concrete is cast, check all reinforcement after it is placed to insure that

reinforcement conforms to Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings. Such checking shall be done only by qualified experienced personnel. In addition, notify the Owner’s Representative at least 36 hours prior to concrete placement so a visit may be made to observe completed reinforcement and formwork before concrete placement.

3.03 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints

1. Construction joints shall be placed a maximum of 40 feet apart. The Contractor shall prepare a placing plan for location of construction joints and submit it to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure. Where a joint is to be made, the surface of the concrete shall be sandblasted or thoroughly picked, thoroughly cleaned, and all laitance removed. In addition to the foregoing, joints shall be thoroughly wetted, but not saturated, and slushed with a coat of grout immediately before the placing of new concrete. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Forms shall be re-tightened before placing of concrete is continued. There shall be an interval of at least 48 hours between adjacent pours.

B. Provide keyways at least 1.5 inches deep in construction joints in foundation walls.



3.04 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices, sleeves, PVC weeps and other

embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

B. Conform to requirements of ACI 318, paragraph 6.3, “Conduits and Pipes Embedded in

Concrete”. C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to

achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

D. Complete cooperation shall be extended suppliers of embedded items in their installation.

Secure information for embedded items from other trades as required. All embedded items shall be securely anchored in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete.

3.05 PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A General: Coat contact surfaces for forms with an approved form-coating compound

before placing reinforcement. B Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact

with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained

steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,

reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. General: Comply with ACl 304 “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete”, and as specified.

C. If concrete pumping is proposed, refer to “Submittals” paragraph in this Section for requirements. Concrete may be placed into the pump at the maximum but not more than the specified slump.

D. Remove water and foreign matter from forms and excavations and, except in the freezing

weather or as otherwise directed, thoroughly soak wood forms just prior to placing concrete. Place no concrete on frozen substrate, and provide adequate protection against frost action during freezing weather.



E. To secure bond at construction joints, thoroughly clean concrete surfaces with water jet or compressed air. Just before new concrete is deposited, saturate joint surface with water for not less than 2 hours, leaving surface without free or glistening water.

F. Do not place concrete having slump outside of allowable slump range. The loss of slump

between pump and discharge end of pipeline shall not exceed 2 inches. G. Transport concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods

which prevent separation of ingredients and displacement of reinforcement, and which avoid rehandling. Deposit no partially hardened concrete. When concrete is conveyed by chutes, equipment shall be of such size and U-shaped design as to insure continuous flow in chute. Do not use flat (coal) chutes, Use metal or metal-lined chutes with different portions having approximately the same slope. Slope shall not be less than 25 degrees nor more than 45 degrees from horizontal. Use a baffle or spout at the discharge end of the chute to prevent segregation. If discharge end of chute is more than 5 feet (1500 mm) above surface of concrete in forms, use spout with its lower end at surface of deposit. When operation is intermittent, discharge chute into hopper. Do not allow concrete to flow horizontally over distances exceeding 5 feet.

H. Place concrete in such manner as to prevent segregation and accumulations of hardened

concrete on forms or reinforcement above mass of concrete being placed. To achieve this end, use suitable hoppers, spouts with restricted outlets and tremies as required.

I. During and immediately after depositing, compact concrete in accordance with ACI 309

by means of internal type mechanical vibrators or other tools to produce required quality of finish. Vibration shall be done by experienced operators under close supervision and shall be performed only enough to produce homogeneity and optimum consolidation without permitting segregation of constituents or ‘pumping’ of air. Vibrators used for normal weight concrete shall operate at speed of not less than 7,000 rpm and be of suitable capacity. Do not use vibrators to move concrete. Keep at least one vibrator on hand for every 10 cubic yards of concrete placed per hour, plus one spare. Vibrators shall be operable and on site prior to starting placement.

J. Place vertical lifts to not exceed 18 inches. Vibrate through successive lifts to avoid pour

lines. Vibrate first lift thoroughly until top of lift glistens to avoid stone pockets, honeycomb, and segregation.

K. Deposit concrete continuously, and in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be

deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and planes of weakness within section. If section cannot be placed continuously between planned construction joints, as specified, introduce a joint and additional reinforcement so as to preserve structural continuity. Notify Owner’s Representative in any such case.

L. Cold joints, particularly in exposed concrete, including ‘honeycomb”, are unacceptable.

If they occur, Owner’s Representative may require that entire section in which such defect occurs be removed and replaced with new materials at Contractor’s expense

M. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,

within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.



1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.

2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.

N. Clean chutes, hoppers, spouts, adjacent work, etc. before and after each run; discharge water and debris outside form.

O. Temperature of the concrete mix should be between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 85

degrees Fahrenheit and it should not vary more than approximately 10 degrees Fahrenheit from the temperature of the concrete against which it is placed.

P. Cold-weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect

concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

Q. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees Fahrenheit,

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit and not more than 80 degrees Fahrenheit at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents

or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3. Concrete and formwork must be kept at a temperature of not less than 50 degrees

Fahrenheit for not less than 96 hours after placing. R. Hot-weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and

strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement to below 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Mixing water may be chilled or chipped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.

2. No concrete shall be deposited when the air temperature is greater than 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes to hot. so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

4. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas

5. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.



3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Concrete Finish Schedule

1. Hidden Vertical Surfaces shall be rough-formed. 2. Hidden Horizontal Surfaces shall be smooth trowelled.

B. Definitions

1. Smooth Trowel Finish: At tops of walls and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 0.25 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. Clean and dampen tie-holes and fill solid with patching material immediately after form removal.

3.08 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by

other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and

foundations as shown on Contract Documents. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.09 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Where corrosion inhibitor admixture has been used, provide continuous water-fog spray or mist or evaporation retardant to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks during initial setting time. In hot, dry and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer’s instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after

placing and finishing Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days

C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-

retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified. D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.



2. Use continuous water-fog spray 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover

with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch (100 mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

E. Apply curing compound on slabs, concrete toppings and equipment pads as follows:

1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete.

F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including supported slabs, and

other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces by applying the appropriate curing

method. 3.10 SHORES AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring, and as specified B. Remove shoring and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured

concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive stress or deflection.

3.11 REMOVING FORMS

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls,

columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Remove forms only after concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its own

weight, all construction live loads to be placed thereon, and lateral loads, all without damage to the work or excessive deflection. Remove forms in accordance with ACI 347. Do not pry against the face of concrete to remove forms. Use wooden wedges where necessary. Remove form ties in a manner so as not to damage concrete surfaces.

C. All forms and miscellaneous appurtenances shall be removed from concrete prior to the

closeout of the work.



3.12 REUSING FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will be rejected. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,

remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure Joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Intent of this Specification is to require forms, mixtures of concrete, and workmanship to

be of the very best quality so that final, stripped concrete surfaces will require no patching, except for plugging of tie holes.

B. Clean and dampen tie holes and fill solid with patching mortar immediately after form

removal. C. Patching Defective Areas: Patch and repair defective areas, as specified, only after

examination and approval by the Owner’s Representative. Repair and patch as soon as possible after removing forms, in compliance with ACI 301 Chapter 9 and as specified in this Section.

D. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland Cement to 2½ parts fine aggregate

passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. 1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 0.25 inch in any dimension, and

holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. If honeycomb exists around reinforcement, chip to provide clear space at least 0.75 inch wide all around steel to ensure proper bond thereto. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with epoxy adhesive. Place patching mortar before epoxy adhesive has dried. Repairs thicker than one and 0.5 inch shall be built-up on successive days, each layer of 1.5 inches being applied as described in ACI 301 Chapter 9.

2. Remove and replace patches that become crazed, cracked, or sound hollow upon tapping, at Contractor’s expense.

E. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if

defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. Repair concealed formed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete’s durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.

F. Repairing Unformed Surfaces (except concrete pavements): Test unformed surfaces, such

as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope



1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete’s durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used subject to the approval of the Owner’s Representative

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 0.75-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish patching concrete to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

G. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack

method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched areas continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

H. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Owner’s Representative for method

and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of the Owner’s Representative.

3.14 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

A. The following concrete work shall be considered defective and may be ordered by the

Owner’s Representative to be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense: 1. Incorrectly formed. 2. Not plumb or level. 3. Not specified strength. 4. Containing rock pockets, voids, honeycomb, or cold joints. 5. Containing wood or foreign matter. 6. Surface texture does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 7. Forms and miscellaneous appurtenances not removed. 8. Otherwise not in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents.





A. Furnishing, installing and removing as applicable all forms, form ties, reinforcing steel and mesh, control joints and expansion joints, inserts, waterstops, anchors, sleeves, bolts, plates and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 03 3000.01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE will be measured PER CUBIC

YARD, installed complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by a payment items. Such price shall

constitute full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the Work as described in this Section.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

03 3000.01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CUBIC YARD

END OF SECTION


04 0503 - 1 MORTARS

SECTION 04 0503 MORTARS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1.02 SUMMARY

A. This specification covers mortars for use in the construction of all unit masonry as required for the project. In this specification, the term mortar shall be understood to mean mortar composed of Portland cement, hydrated lime, sand and water.

B. Mortar Designations and Locations

1. Unit Masonry, Exterior - Type "S". 2. Stone Work - Type "S"; provide additive for work exposed to the weather

1.03 RELATED WORK


Specifications: 1. Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY 2. Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS 3. Section 10 7450 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES 4. Section 12 1213 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL SYSTEM 5. Section 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM Standards

C 5 Quicklime for Structural Purposes C 91 Masonry Cement C 109 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-

in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens) C 110 Test Methods for Physical Testing of Quicklime, Hydrated Lime, and Limestone C 128 Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of

Fine Aggregate C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar C 150 Portland Cement C 188 Test Method for Density of Hydraulic Cement C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes


04 0503 - 2 MORTARS

C 270 Mortar for Unit Masonry C 305 Practice for Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and Mortars of

Plastic Consistency C 387 Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete C 476 Grout for Reinforced Masonry C 595 Blended Hydraulic Cements C 780 Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for

Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry C 952 Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units C 1072 Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength C 1093 Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry C 1142 Specification for Ready Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry. C 1180 Terminology of Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry C 1232 Terminology of Masonry C 1324 Test Method for Examination and Analysis of Hardened Masonry Mortar C 1329 Specification for Mortar Cement C 1357 Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength C 1384 Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars C 1489 Specification for Lime Putty for Structural Purposes C 1506 Test Method for Water Retention of Hydraulic Cement-Based Mortars and

Plasters C 1586 Guide for Quality Assurance of Mortars E 72 Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction

B. Mortar shall meet the requirements of the local governing codes unless directed to the contrary by the Architect.

1.05 SUBMITTALS – Coordinate with Section 01 3300

A. Certification of Specification Compliance B. Schedule of uses, by Mortar Type. C. Reports of quality control testing. D. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) must be submitted for each

manufactured product. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All manufactured materials shall be delivered to the job site in unopened factory sealed containers clearly labeled as to product, manufacturer, use and/or other pertinent characteristics.

B. All packaged and loose materials shall be stored under proper environmental conditions

to prevent contamination from excessive temperature changes, foreign materials and the like that may have an adverse effect on same.


04 0503 - 3 MORTARS

1. All perishable materials shall be properly protected and stored in weathertight structures, with floor raised not less than 1 foot above adjoining grade OR, for short intervals, on raised platforms and covered with waterproof tarps.

2. Aggregates shall be stored in clean bins, scows or platforms having hard, clean surfaces.

3. Aggregates of different kinds and sizes shall be placed in different stockpiles.

C. Should segregation of aggregates occur they shall be remixed to conform to the grading requirements.

D. Frozen aggregates or aggregates containing frozen lumps shall be thawed before use. E. Cement that has hardened or partially set shall be removed from the site and not used. F. Washed aggregates and aggregates produced or manipulated by hydraulic methods shall

be allowed to drain for at least 12 hours before use. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

A. No air-entraining admixtures or cementitious materials containing air-entraining admixtures shall be used in the mortar.

No antifreeze compounds or other substances shall be used in the mortar to lower the freezing point.

Calcium chloride or admixtures containing same shall not be used in any mortar employed in the Work.

B. Heat mixing water when air temperature is below 40°F (4°C) and heat aggregates when

air temperature is below 32°F (0°C) to assure mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C) until used.

C. Produce subsequent mortar batches within +/-10°F (5°C) of first batch. D. Do not heat water or sand above 120°F (49°C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. All mortar mixes shall comply with the requirements set forth in ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" and the following:

1. Ready mixed mortar conforming to ASTM C 1142 may be submitted for use

providing 1) same complies with applicable building codes, and 2) same produces both equivalent strength and meets color requirements (if any) as stated in these specifications.


04 0503 - 4 MORTARS

2. Ready mix material shall be similar and equal to that as packaged by Quikrete Boston; 44 Pine Rd, Brentwood, NH 03833- 6509; 800-776-6089, or approved equal.

B. Cement: Shall be an American Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or II,

except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction, as selected by the Owner and shall exhibit no efflorescence when cast into 2 inch x 7 inch x ½ inch slabs comprising the mortar under test.

C. Water: clean, fresh and potable, from public water system. D. Sand: clean, washed, uniformly well-graded, conforming to ASTM C144 with 100 percent

passing No. 8 sieve, and not more than 35 percent passing No. 50 sieve, with a fineness modulus maintained at 2.25 plus or minus 0.10.

E. Hydrated Lime: provide plastic hydrate, conforming to ASTM C207, Type "S" as approved

by the Owner. F. Mix mortar materials to produce mortar cubes having the following compressive

strengths when tested in accordance with Property Specification Table 2 of reference standard C 270. 1. Mortar Type S - 1,800 psi (12.4 MPa) at 28 days.

2.02 MIXING PROCEDURES

A. Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight; do not measure by shovel. B. Mix ingredients in clean mechanical mixer for a minimum of 3 minutes, maximum 5,

with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency. C. Mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from the mortar shall be

retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore the required consistency. Mortars shall be used and placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing.

D. The color of mortar shall be strictly controlled to assure uniformity of color through the

work. 2.03 COLOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Masonry mortar shall be colored as directed by the Owner’s Representative. 1. Colors will be established using pre-weighed, prepackaged proportioned color

unit bags selected from the "A", "H" or "X" color series as manufactured by Solomon Grind-Chem Services or equal by Scofield or Flamingo.

2. Only premixed colored mortar materials are acceptable. NO LIQUID COLORANTS SHALL BE PERMITTED.

B. Colors will be based upon one for stone work of columbarium walls, fountain walls and

paving, planter curb and one for granite paving.


04 0503 - 5 MORTARS

2.04 MORTAR ADDITIVE FOR USE IN SETTING OF EXTERIOR ELEMENTS WITH HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXPOSED TO THE WEATHER.

A. Material shall be a latex additive as manufactured by Boiardi (Elastiment 102) or

Laticrete (3701). B. All mortar additives shall be nontoxic, nonflammable and nonhazardous during storage,

mixing, application and when cured. 1. Finished mortar and grout shall be resistant to dilute acid, dilute alkali, sugar,

brine and calcium chlorides and such other salts present in standard deicing chemicals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. Mix mortar using a mechanical mortar mixer to ensure homogeneity and workability. Hand mixing of the mortar is permitted only with written approval of the Owner’s Representative who will outline hand mixing procedures. Observe mixing times of 4 to 5 minutes, consistent from batch to batch.

B. Use clean, potable water; add the maximum amount consistent with optimum

workability. Maintain a uniform water/cement ratio. C. Rinse out mixer following each batch. D. At the end of the day, thoroughly rinse the mixer to avoid contamination of future mortar

batches. E. Retemper mortar by adding additional mixing water only to replace water lost due to

evaporation. Do not retemper colored mortars. F. Discard mortar 2.5 hours after initial mixing. G. Tool mortar joints when surface is thumbprint hard. Keep tooling time consistent. Do not

strike joint too early or too late in order to maintain color consistency.

H. Cure mortar a minimum of 28 days. 3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Laying stone units: Set masonry units in full bed of mortar with all vertical joints slushed

full. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes solid. Apply enough mortar at bed and end joints to allow mortar to be forced out both sides of the face shell. Wet masonry unit joint surfaces thoroughly before setting. For masonry unit surfaces that are soiled, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials,


04 0503 - 6 MORTARS

unless otherwise indicated. C. Point and fill all holes and cracks in new mortar joints with additional fresh mortar; do not

merely spread adjacent mortar over defect or use dead mortar dropping. Do all pointing while mortar is still soft and plastic. If hardened, chisel defect out and refill solidly with fresh additional mortar and tool as specified.

D. Lay all masonry in full mortar beds. Completely butter vertical edges with mortar.

Completely fill cells of masonry units with mortar where in anchorage and vertical reinforcement items are to be installed and in other locations specified or indicated on the Contract Documents.

E. Joints: Tooled, concave.

3.03 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES FOR MASONRY WORK

A. Maximum variation from true surface level for walls:

1. Unit-to-unit tolerance – one-eighth inch. 2. Surface, overall tolerance – 0.25 inch in 10 feet in any direction when tested with

10-foot straightedge. B. Maximum variation from true vertical plumb lines:

1. In lines of walls: a. 0.25 inch in 10 feet

C. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan:

1. 0.5 inch in up to 20 feet 2. 0.75 inch in 40 feet maximum

3.04 CLEANING

A. Cleaning Method:

1. Clean mortar only with potable water or dry brush. 2. Clean masonry with the least aggressive cleaning solution and technique

possible. 3. Comply with cleaning procedure and recommendations of the manufacturers of

both the cleaning solution and the unit masonry. 4. Utilize the same cleaning procedure on the sample panel at selection and during

construction. 3.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and to the maximum extent economically feasible.


04 0503 - 7 MORTARS

B. Place unused mixed mortar in designated locations where lower strength mortar meets the requirements for bulk fill; for example, use as retaining wall footing ballast, cavity fill at grade, or underground utility pipe kickers.

C. Separate masonry waste and place in designated area for use as structural fill or in

landscaping of the Project. PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Providing and installing mortar will be considered incidental to the Work of this contract. No separate measurement will be made for this Work but it shall be considered incidental to the Work of Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY and Section 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING of this Specification.


A. No separate payment for the Work of this Section will be made under the terms of this Contract. Payment for said Work will be considered incidental to payments for each payment item in Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY and Section 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING of this Specification.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE END OF SECTION

Blank Page


04 4000 - 1 PROJECT STONE

SECTION 04 4000 PROJECT STONE





1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing stone for site improvements including but

not limited to the granite for the Columbarium Walls, Niche Covers, Fountain Basin, Fountain Boulders, Granite Paving, Curbing at Planter, Granite Bench, Raised Curb, Flush Curb, Granite Monument and provision of materials for other miscellaneous stone work as indicated on the Contract Documents

B. Manufacturer shall furnish and deliver stone covered by this Section. Manufacturer shall

unload stone in locations designated by the Owner at the Project Site. Furnishing, delivery, unloading and placement in stockpile location at the Project site shall be performed and paid for under the work of this Section.

C. Stone materials specified in this Section will be installed in other Sections. Examine all

other Sections of the Specifications for requirements that affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

D. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.

Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.


A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1. Section 01 2300 ALTERNATES 2. Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY 4. Section 04 0503 MORTARS 5. Section 10 7450 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES 6. Section 32 1645 GRANITE CURB 7. Section 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING



1.04 REFERENCES A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) most current editions:

C 97 Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone

C 99 Test Methods for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone C 119 Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone C 170 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone C 241 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic C 615 Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone C 880 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone C1515 Standard Guide to Cleaning of Exterior Dimension Stone, Vertical and

Horizontal Surfaces, New or Existing C1528 Standard Guide for Selection of Dimension Stone for Exterior Use

C. National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (NBGQA):

Specifications Specifications for Architectural Granite 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 3300 SUBMITTALS.

B. Stone Samples - Quantities and Sizes: Six pieces 12 inches by 12 inches by 0.5 inches

thick tiles for each type of granite specified in this Section.

C. Stone Surface Finish Submittals: Show surface finishes produced by each manufacturer for each type of granite specified, including thermal, rock face, sawn, sand blasted and polished. Multiple submittals may be required to achieve the desired mix of surface textures of different granites or of the same granite for specific uses.

D. Samples for Columbaria:

1. Surface finish submittals for all finishes specified. 2. End piece of capstone for widest columbarium wall, full sized in height and

width. Provide length of 12 inches. Provide specified textures on top, vertical and bottom faces. a. Particular attention will be given to vertical arriss lines at corners where

rock faces join and the arriss lines where top surface meets vertical rock face surfaces. Provide one edge eased one millimeter.

E. Samples for Fountain Basin Walls:

1. Surface finish submittals for all finishes specified. F. Sample for Boulders in Fountain Basins:

1. Sculpted Boulder, half-size scale, representative of shape and form, showing flame finish texture or texture that simulates a natural boulder finish.



G. Samples for Granite Paving: 1. Surface finish submittal.

H. Shop Drawings showing details of stone pieces to be provide indicating: cross sections,

elevations showing layout of all pieces, sizes, dimensions, finishes, arrangement and provisions for jointing, anchoring, cut-out and holes, and other necessary details for reception of other work. 1. Contract Documents shall indicate locations of inserts for stone anchors and

supports which are to be built into concrete, and locations and dimensions of cut-outs, holes, openings, and other provisions required for the work of other trades.

2. Shop drawings shall indicate the setting number of each piece and each piece shall bear the corresponding number in a non-staining paint.

I. Test Report: Submit reports from tests conforming to ASTM C 67 methods indicating:

1. Compressive strength, psi. (ASTM C 170). 2. Density, pounds per cubic foot (ASTM C 97). 3. Absorption by weight, percentage (ASTM C 97). 4 Abrasion resistance (ASTM C 241). 5. Flexural strength pounds per square inch (MPa) (ASTM C 880). 6. Modulus of rupture, average (pounds per square inch) (ASTM C 99).


A. Qualification of manufacturer: A firm experienced in fabricating stone units similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.

B. Source Limitations for Stone: For each specified application obtain stone units through

one source from a single quarry pit. C. Stone shall be supplied by a source approved by the Owner. D. Stone shall be standard grade, sound and uniform in quality, texture, and strength, and

shall free of flaws, reeds, rifts, laminations, cracks, seams, starts, or other defects which may impair its strength, durability, or appearance. Exposed surfaces shall be free from spots, spalls, chips, stains, discoloration, or other defects which would affect its appearance.

E. Color, texture, and finish shall be within the range of samples approved by the Owner’s

Representative.

1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with that of other sections affected by this work, as necessary to assure

the steady progress of the work under the Contract. B. Do all cutting and drilling to accommodate work of other sections, as expressly indicated

and as reasonably inferred from Contract Documents, as required for the proper



completion of the Work, and as directed by the Owner.

1.08 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Stone shall be carefully packed and banded by the supplier for shipment. Following

shipment and delivery, stone shall be stored in a secure location at the site on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane and protected from the weather. Skids shall be placed and stacked in such a manner as to evenly distribute the weight of the stone materials and to prevent breakage, cracking, and damage to stone pieces. Stone materials shall be stored in such a manner as to allow air to circulate around the stone material. Stone shall not be permitted to be in direct contact with the ground any time during storage.

B. Stone shall be carefully handled to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling, or other damage.

Pinch or wrecking bars shall not be used without protecting edges of stone with wood or other rigid materials. Stone units shall be lifted with wide-belt type slings wherever possible; wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances which might cause staining or damage to stone finish shall not be used.

C. Stone damaged in any manner will be rejected and shall be replaced with new materials

at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRANITE – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. GRANITE: Comply with the physical requirements and properties of ASTM C615 and

with "Specifications for Building Granite" National Building Quarries Association, Inc., for color and finish qualities. Granite shall be sound and uniform in quality, texture, and strength, and shall be free of flaws, reeds, rifts, laminations, cracks, seams, starts, or other defects that may impair its strength, durability, function, or appearance. Exposed surfaces shall be free from spots, spalls, chips, stains, discoloration, or other defects that would affect its appearance. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Granite Properties: Unless otherwise indicated granite as supplied shall meet or exceed

the following: 1. Bulk Density (ASTM C 97): 182.6 pounds per cubic foot, average. 2. Absorption (ASTM C 97): 0.12 percent, average. 3. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 170): 29,000 pounds per square inch, average. 4. Modulus of Rupture (ASTM C 99): 2,385 pounds per square inch, average.

2.02 SCHEDULE OF GRANITE MATERIALS

A. Granite for Columbarium Walls, including Niche Covers, End Wall Stone, Base Stone,

Veneer, Solid Granite Corners and Capstones, Raised Curb, Benches and Monument. 1. Granite for the above uses shall be a light gray color, with a very fine grain and

black mica specks sprinkled across its surface in a dense, even pattern.



2. Granite shall be: a. ‘GI-614’ as provided by GI Stone, 55 Turbine Way, Merrimack, NH,

03054, 603-424-4007, or approved equal.

B. Granite for Fountain Basin Walls, Boulders in Fountains, Unit Paving in Fountains and Planter Curb.

1. Granite for the above uses shall be a fine to medium grained black stone. 2. Granite shall be chosen from one of the following:

a. ‘GI-11’ as provided by GI Stone, 55 Turbine Way, Merrimack, NH, 03054, 603-424-4007, or ‘American Black’ as provided by Rock of Ages Quarry, 560 Graniteville Road, Graniteville, VT 05654, 877-870-9057, or approved equal.

C. Granite for Unit Paving in Plaza and Flush Curb. 1. Granite for the above uses shall feature large swirls of dark grey and black

through a background of peach, pink and red. 2. Granite shall be:

a. ‘Dakota Mahogany’ as provided by Granites of America, Smithfield, RI, 401-232-2040, or approved equal.

2.03 GRANITE FINISHES

A. General: 1. All beds, joints and other surfaces hidden from view shall be sawn. 2. Ease exposed corners not shown to be radiused. 3. Exposed faces shall be rock face, hand carved, thermal, sand-blasted and/or

polished as noted herein or as shown on the drawings. 4. Finish all exposed surfaces of the stone with the finishes specified and approved.

All finishes shall be applied to produce a visually uniform result.

B. Definition of Granite Finishes: 1. Thermal finish: the finish produced by application of high-temperature flame to

the surface of the granite. Texture shall be non-slip with depth of pitted texture no greater than 2 mm.

2. Sand blast finish: A matte-textured surface without gloss achieved by the steady flow of sand and water though a broad dispersal orifice under pressure against a previously sawn surface.

3. Polished: Mirror gloss with sharp reflections. 4. Rock Face: A coarse texture achieved by splitting the stone to a rough face with

edges of the stone pitched off to the line of the joint or arriss of the stone. The projection of the center of the stone beyond the plane of the joint or arriss shall be no greater than one-half inch.

C. Schedule of Granite Finishes on Exposed Faces:

1. Granite Pavers: Thermal. 2. Columbarium Wall Cap: Rock Face on vertical faces, Sand blast on top face. 3. Columbarium Wall Base: Rock Face on vertical faces. 4. Columbarium Wall Veneer: Sand blast. Veneer shall be cut flat, with no radii.



5. Columbarium Niche Covers: Sand blast. Covers shall be cut flat, with no radii. 6. Fountain Walls – Exterior Facing: Rock Face on vertical faces. 7. Fountain Walls – Interior Facing: Polished on vertical faces. 8. Fountain Walls: Polished on top face. 9. Fountain Paving: Polished. 10. Raised Curbing: Thermal. 11. Planter Curb: Thermal. 12. Flush Curb: Thermal. 13. Benches: Thermal. 14. Granite Boulders for Fountain Basin: Hand sculpted so that the finish simulates a

natural boulder finish.

D. General:

1. Size and Dimension: Granite shall be of the sizes and dimensions indicated on the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings.

3. Bottom and sides of granite pieces which are concealed in the finished work shall be sawn to true planes. Sawn backs shall be cleaned of rust stains and iron particles.

5. Arrises shall be cut sharp and true to square, and continuous with adjoining arrises. Where exposed, arrises shall be eased as shown on the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings.

2.04 GRANITE FABRICATION

A. Cut all stone as required accurately to shape and dimensions indicated on the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings. Cut to curvature where required. Fabricate stone to pitch in multiple directions as required. All exposed arrises shall be in true alignment and slightly eased to prevent snipping. 1. All faces shall be at right angles to the plane of the top, except as indicated

otherwise for capstones of columbarium walls and miscellaneous others. 2. Beds and joints shall be at right angles to the face and joints shall have a uniform

thickness.

B. Provide all necessary holes, slots, recesses and sinkages for accessories in accordance with industry standard practices. Provide cramp holes or Lewis pin holes for stones that can not be handled manually. No holes for handling devices will be allowed in exposed surfaces. Provide all cutting and drilling of stone to accommodate other trades.

C. Dimensional Tolerance

1. Thickness: the variation from nominal thickness as specified shall not exceed the following. 3/4" up to 1-1/2" +/- 1/8" Over 1-1/2" up to 2-1/2" +/- 1/4" Over 2-1/2" up to 3-1/2" +/- 3/8" Over 3-1/2" +/- 1/2"

2. Face Dimensions: Maximum variation in the dimension of any piece shall be 1/4

of the specified bed joint width, however, in any case not less than +/- 1/16".



D. Flatness Tolerances: Variation from true plane or flat surfaces shall be determined by a 4 foot dimension in any direction on the surface. Such variations on polished surfaces shall not exceed tolerances listed below or 1/3 of the specified joint width, whichever is greater. On surfaces having other finishes, the maximum variation from true plane shall not exceed the tolerance listed below or 1/2 of the specified joint width whichever is greater. 1. Polished finishes: 1/16" 2. Sawn and sand blast finishes: 1/8" 3. Thermal finishes: 3/16"

E. Beds and Joints: Pieces shall be bedded and jointed as shown on the approved shop

drawings.

F. Backs of Pieces: Backs of pieces shall be sawn or roughly dressed to approximate true planes. Sawn backs shall be cleaned of all rust stains and free from iron particles. Wherever shown on approved shop drawings, pieces shall be backed off to clear structural members or other obstructions.

G. Moldings, Washes and Drips shall be constant in profile throughout their length, in strict

conformity with details shown on approved shop drawings. H. Incidental Cutting and Drilling: Where thickness permits, all pieces weighing over 100

pounds may have Lewis holes for lifting if desired. Lewis holes may extend no closer than 2" from the finished face, and will not be permitted on exposed surfaces except with written permission of the Owner’s Representative. Pieces under 4" in thickness may have holes for C-clamps if required on surfaces not exposed.

I. Anchor Tolerances

1. The centers of all back anchors cut into stone shall be within +/- 1/4" of the location specified on the shop drawings. The dimensions of all back anchor sinkages shall be as shown on the shop drawings within a tolerance of +/- 1/16". The thickness of slots or kerfs cut into the edge of stone for anchorage purposes shall be within +/- 1/16" of the dimension shown on the shop drawings. The location across the stone thickness on the centers of slots or kerfs cut into the edge of stone shall be as stated on the shop drawings within a tolerance of +/- 1/16".

2. Depth of kerfs, rebated kerfs or anchor holes shall be as shown on the shop drawings, but shall be allowed to vary in depth to a minimum required for anchorage clearance and a maximum not to impact the structural integrity of the anchoring system. In any case tolerances of -1/8" +3/8" will be allowed.

J. Shop clean granite at time of final fabrication.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION A. Granite for Columbarium Wall Cap and Base Stones:

1. Underside of capstone and exposed lip of base stones of columbarium walls where exposed to view shall be sand blast finished.

2. Dress the bottom of all base stone pieces that abut granite unit paving to the exact grade of the paving so that unit pavers can be butted up directly against the dressed bottom edge. Allow no deviation in dressed edge from piece to piece of base stones.

B. Granite for Pavers shall be sawn on six sides and shall allow a tolerance of plus or minus

1/16 inch in horizontal directions but shall be gauged at a consistent thickness.

C. Granite Boulders for Fountain Basin: 1. Shape and form of boulders shall be derived by reductive sculpting from pieces

selected from randomly shaped blocks available at the quarry or from rectangular blocks cut back to the requirements of the Detailed Drawings.

2. Boulders shall be sawn flat on bottoms. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND INSTALLATION

A. Delivery, storage and handling of stone at the Project site shall be specified, performed

and paid for under the work of this Section. B. Installation of all stone shall be specified, performed and paid for under the work of the

cited Divisions 04 and 32 Sections noted above. Concrete foundations and footings shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, of this Specification.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Item No. 04 4000.01 GRANITE FOR COLUMBARIUM WALLS, not including niche

covers, will be measured as a LUMP SUM, delivered to the Site complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

B. Item No. 04 4000.02 GRANITE FOR FOUNTAIN BASIN will be measured as a LUMP

SUM, delivered to the Site complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

C. Item No. 04 4000.03 GRANITE FOR UNIT PAVING will be measured as a LUMP




D. Item No. 04 4000.04 GRANITE FOR PLANTER CURB will be measured as a LUMP SUM, delivered to the Site complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

E. Item No. 04 4000.05 GRANITE FOR BENCHES will be measured as a LUMP SUM,

delivered to the Site complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

F. Item No. 04 4000.06 GRANITE FOR RAISED CURB will be measured as a LUMP SUM, delivered to the Site complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

G. Item No. 04 4000.07 GRANITE FOR FLUSH CURB will be measured as a LUMP


H. Item No. 04 4000.08 GRANITE FOR MONUMENT will be measured as a LUMP SUM,


I. Item No. 04 4000.09 GRANITE FOR BOULDERS AT FOUNTAIN will be measured as

a LUMP SUM, delivered to the Site complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

J. Item No. 04 4000.10 GRANITE FOR NICHE COVERS will be measured per EACH,



A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by payment items. Such price shall

constitute full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the Work as described in this Section. Installation of granite materials shall not be paid for in this Section, but will be paid in Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY.



4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

04 4000.01 GRANITE FOR COLUMBARIUM WALLS LUMP SUM 04 4000.02 GRANITE FOR FOUNTAIN BASIN LUMP SUM 04 4000.03 GRANITE FOR UNIT PAVING LUMP SUM 04 4000.04 GRANITE FOR PLANTER CURB LUMP SUM 04 4000.05 GRANITE FOR BENCHES LUMP SUM 04 4000.06 GRANITE FOR RAISED CURB LUMP SUM 04 4000.07 GRANITE FOR FLUSH CURB LUMP SUM 04 4000.08 GRANITE FOR MONUMENT LUMP SUM 04 4000.09 GRANITE FOR BOULDERS AT FOUNTAIN LUMP SUM 04 4000.10 GRANITE FOR NICHE COVERS EACH END OF SECTION


07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS






1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all equipment and materials to caulk and seal joints, as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Sealing of expansion joints and all other joints in exterior construction indicated

to receive joint sealer. 2. All other exterior sealing called for, or reasonably inferred from the Contract

Documents, and as required to provide weather tight conditions in exterior assemblies.



Specifications: 1. Section 32 1400 GRANITE UNIT PAVING 2. Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C 920 Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants C 1193 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants D 412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers

and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension D 624 Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized

Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data, specifications, standard

details, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each sealant material used. Provide certifications that sealant materials comply with specified requirements.



B. Initial Selection Samples: Submit samples manufacturer's color charts showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each material used.

C. Verification Samples: Submit actual representative samples of each sealant material that

is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Provide sealant samples having minimum size of 4 inches long.

D. Test Reports: Provide certified reports for all specified tests.

1.06 COMPATIBILITY

A. Provide sealant and sealant joint backing materials suitable for the use intended and

compatible with the materials with which they will be in contact. Compatibility of sealant and accessories shall be verified by the sealant manufacturer.


A. Source: For each sealant material type required for the work of this section, provide

primary materials that are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary or accessory materials that are acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials.

B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience in type of work required by this

Section. C. Mock-Ups: Prior to commencing the primary work of this Section, provide mock-ups at

locations acceptable to Owner. Obtain Owner's acceptance of visual qualities. Protect and maintain accepted mock-ups throughout the remainder of the work of this section to serve as criteria for acceptance of the work.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather: Perform work of this Section only when existing or forecasted weather

conditions are within the limits established by manufacturers of the materials and products used.

B. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetration work is

complete.

1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Materials under this Section shall be delivered to, and stored at, the job site in unbroken

factory sealed containers with labels intact.

1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish joint sealant manufacturer's written single-source performance warranty that

joint sealant work will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency for 5 years from date of Substantial Completion of the Project.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Before installation check each sealant for compatibility with adjacent materials and surfaces and with indicated exposures. Select sealers that are recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated. Where exposed to pedestrian or vehicular traffic, provide sealants that are non-tracking and are strong enough to withstand the traffic without damage.

B. Provide colors as selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard and special colors.

Where specifically requested, provide custom color matches.

2.02 SELF-LEVELING POLYURETHANE SEALANT

A. Provide two or more part, self-leveling, polyurethane based elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type 1 Class A, having Shore A hardness of not less than 30 when tested according to ASTM C 920, cured modulus of elasticity at 100 percent elongation of not more than 150 psi, when tested according to ASTM D 412, and tear resistance of not less than 50 pounds per inch when tested according to ASTM D 624.

B. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements: Review sealants based on application and materials to receive sealant

1. Pecora Urexpan NR-200. 2. Mameco Vulkem 245 or 255. 3. Sika 2C, SL. 4. Sonneborn Sonolastic PvJtSt. 5. Tremco THC 900.

C. Extent: Provide self-leveling polyurethane sealant for paving joints.

2.03 NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT

A. Provide multi-part, non-sag, polyurethane based elastomeric sealant, complying with

ASTM C 920 Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, having Shore A hardness of 20 to 30, cured modulus of elasticity at 100 percent elongation of not more than 0,52 MPa.

B. Provide one of the following products that meet or exceed specified requirements:

1. Mameco International Vulkem 227. 2. Harry S. Peterson Co. Iso-Flex 2000. 3. Sika Sikaflex 2c NS. 4. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 2. 5. Tremco Dymeric.

C. Extent: Provide non-sag polyurethane sealant for all vertical masonry to masonry joints and other joints not indicated to be sealed with another type of sealant.



2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be

adhered to. B. Bond Breaker Tape: Provide polyethylene or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer to prevent three-sided adhesion. C. Backer Rod: Provide compressible rod of durable nonabsorptive material recommended

by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. Provide products of one of the following manufacturers:

1. Backer Rod Manufacturing and Supply Co. 2. Dow Chemical Co. 3. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 4. Williams Products, Inc. 5. Woodmont Products, Inc.

D. Joint backing for general use at joints in horizontal surfaces shall consist of two rows of butyl rubber or neoprene foam rod in contact with one another, and each compressed to approximately 2/3 original width when in place.

E. Provide miscellaneous materials of type that will not bleed through sealant, discolor

surface, or produce other deleterious effects. Select size to provide compression to approximately 2/3 original width when in place. Provide backing material profile concave to the rear of the sealant, and equipped with a bond-breaking film.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. The Installer shall examine substrates and conditions under which this work is to be

performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of sealant work means Installer's acceptance of joint surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Strictly comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, except where

more restrictive requirements are specified in this Section. B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealants, primers, tapes and

fillers. Remove substances which could interfere with bond. Etch or roughen joint surfaces to improve bond. Surfaces which have been given protective coatings and those that contain oil or grease shall be thoroughly cleaned with xylol or MEK solvent, with due precautions taken to minimize hazards.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, use of sealants shall conform to ASTM C 1193.



D. Tape or mask adjoining surfaces to prevent spillage and migration problems. E. Prime surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Provide backer rods for joint sealants except where specifically recommended against by

sealant manufacturers. B. Prevent three-sided adhesion by use of bond breaker tapes or backer rods. C. Force sealant into joints to provide uniform, dense, continuous ribbons free from gaps

and air pockets. Completely wet both joint surfaces equally on opposite sides. D. Except in hot weather, make sealant surface slightly concave. Install sealants so that

compressed sealants do not protrude from joints. Dry tool sealants to form a smooth dense surface. At horizontal joints form a slight cove to prevent trapping water.

E. Provide sealants to depths indicated, or if not indicated, follow manufacturer's

recommendations. 3.04 EXTENT OF SEALANT WORK

A. General Extent: Seal joints indicated, and all exterior joints, seams, and intersections

between dissimilar materials. Provide elastomeric sealant installation with backer rod in all exterior expansion joints.

B. Exterior Sealing: Without limitation, the work of this Section includes sealing the

following:

1. Sealant joints in columbarium walls, fountain walls, expansion joints in granite unit paving and all miscellaneous stone-to-stone joints indicated.

3.05 CURING

A. Cure sealants in strict compliance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations

to obtain highest quality surface and maximum adhesion. Make every effort to minimize accelerated aging effects and increase in modulus of elasticity.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove smears from adjacent surfaces immediately, as the work progresses. Exercise

particular care to prevent smearing or staining of surrounding surfaces which will be exposed in the finished work, and repair any damage done to same as result of this work without additional cost to Owner.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces using materials and methods recommended by sealant

manufacturer. Where required, high pressure washing or the use of chemical cleaners shall be employed to clean adjacent surfaces.



C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned or work that is damaged or deteriorated.

D. Provide temporary protection to ensure sealant work is not damaged following

acceptance of sealant work. Protection may include covering of joints subject to damage during remainder of construction period. Remove protection immediately before final acceptance.



A. Providing and installing sealant joints in vertical and horizontal conditions will be considered incidental to the Work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for this Work but shall be considered incidental to the Work of Sections of this Specification where sealant joints are required.



Contract. Payment for said Work will be considered incidental to the Work of Sections of this Specification where sealant joints are required.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION


10 7450 - 1 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 10 7450 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES





1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies requirements for purchase, delivery and installation of

columbarium niche assembly units.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1. Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE 3. Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 3300 SUBMITTALS.

B. Samples for Columbaria:

1. Fully assembled sample of typical columbarium niche system including structural divisions, systems hardware (lock brackets, lock clips, rods, multiple niche adjusters, swivel sockets and miscellaneous fastening apparatus’ required to fulfill design objectives), EM anchors, masonry ties and anchors necessary to fully integrate columbarium units with granite niche covers provided under the work of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE, appurtenances and miscellaneous components required to build and erect columbarium walls.

C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Supply for all components of columbarium niche assemblies, including structural divisions, systems hardware, anchors, appurtenances and miscellaneous components.

D. Shop Drawings

1. Coordinate with Sections 04 4000 PROJECT STONE and 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY.

2. Complete erection drawings of all columbarium niche assemblies.



a. General: Show all dimensions and details of construction, installation and relation to adjoining work, reinforcements, anchorage, attachments, inserts, location of all pre-drilled sleeves and other items to be installed in the work of other trades and other work required for a complete installation.

b. Where columbarium assemblies require special fabrication standards for granite niche cover, capstone, veneer and block construction, provide all required templates and direction to achieve full integration of the work of this Section with all Division 04 assemblies.

1.05 SAMPLE PANEL FOR COLUMBARIUM WALLS – USING TYPE D AS TYPICAL

A. Coordinate with requirements of Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY for sample panel.

B. Before starting masonry, lay up a sample panel in Section 04 4300 to include at least one

vertical column of columbarium niches.

C. Use sample panel approved by the Owner for standard of workmanship of columbarium assemblies moving forward.

D. Sample panel may remain in place in permanent location if approved by the Owner.

Remove and replace any items affected by defects, poor quality or damage are detected by the Owner’s Representative. Rebuild the items to suit requirements stipulated by the Owner in writing. Multiple sample panels may be required and objection to requirement for multiple sample panels will be dismissed.

1.06 REFERENCES

A. United States Patents:

1. 4,644,771 - Fastening Apparatus for Shutters.

2. Des. 395,121 - Round Columbarium

3. 5,195,812 - Columbarium

4. 5,802,781 - Soffit Lock

1.07 QUALITY STANDARDS A. Installer of columbarium assemblies shall be same mason as will install unit masonry

components of Columbarium Walls. See Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY for requirements.

B. Pre-installation Conference:

1. Schedule a meeting with the columbarium niche installer and the Owner’s Representative at a time sufficiently in advance of masonry installation to permit coordination.

2. At the meeting review columbarium assembly quality control requirements including details of construction, outstanding submittals, Contract Documents and Specifications, and on site conditions affecting or which may affect installations.



3. Contractor shall record discussions, including agreements or disagreements on matters of quality control. Furnish copies of recorded discussions to each participant within 3 working days of the meeting.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all items, appurtenances and miscellaneous components of the columbarium wall

assemblies to the Project site without additional cost to the Owner. B. Protect columbarium assemblies and manufactured products of all types from wetting by

rain or snow, and keep covered when not in use.

C. Handle all materials carefully in transit and on the site so as to keep units whole and intact, clean and undamaged. Deliver on pallets, handled individually or in suitable groups and properly stacked with minimum protection.

D. Manufactured items: Deliver all manufactured products in their original containers, plainly marked with product identification and manufacturer's name.

E. Store columbarium assemblies and components under cover, away from direct contact with ground, and in a manner to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt, grease and oil.

F. Damaged material: Remove all damaged and contaminated materials from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages and packages bearing water marks or other evidence of damage, unless the Owner specifically authorizes correction and use on the project.

G. Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of granite niche covers to the columbaria company,

for installation of hardware.

1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 04 4300, UNIT MASONRY, of this

Specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES AND COMPONENTS

A. Columbaria assemblies shall be pre-fabricated, pre-assembled modules of niches to warehouse cremated remains in owner supplied urns. Assemblies shall be sized at 12 inch square niches. Columbaria assemblies shall include, but not be limited to, framework of vertical risers of fiber reinforced concrete, brackets to attach shelving, said shelving, backing covers and all appurtenances necessary to erect the modular niche system. Fastening apparatus shall be hidden, yet operable from the front face of the



granite niche covers (supplied elsewhere in these specifications) and married to a soffit locking system of studs and nuts attached integrally attached to the framework system.

B. Provide all assemblies, connectors, appurtenances and miscellaneous items required to construct complete and in place columbarium assembles that are whole and one with cast-in-pace concrete foundations and stone masonry veneer, niche covers, end walls and capstones.

C. As standard for manufactured components, custom built columbaria niche assemblies shall be manufactured by Eickhof Columbaria, Inc. Crookston, MN, http://www.eickhofcolumbaria.com/, or approved equal.

D. Materials and assemblies shall be in conformance with the referenced US Patents cited in this Section.

E. Refer to the Drawings for the schematic requirements of the columbarium walls. Provide full shop drawings of all assemblies that fulfill the design goals represented schematically in the Drawings.

2.02 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT

A. Concrete foundation walls, concrete caps, concrete infill and reinforcing steel shall be specified, furnished, installed and paid for under the Section 03 3000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, of this Specification. Fully coordinate the work of this Section 10 7450 with 03 3000 and require same degree of coordination from Section 03 3000 to Section 10 7450.

2.03 GRANITE

A. Granite niche covers, cap stones, veneer pieces and blocks shall be as specified under the work of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE and installed under the work of Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY. Fully coordinate the work of this Section 10 7450 with 04 4300 and require same degree of coordination from Section 04 4300 to Section 10 7450.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall inspect the job site conditions prior to commencing Work of this Section.

Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of assembling columbarium niche components.

B. Examine existing conditions for coordination with other trades and other section of this

Specification C. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

B. Inspect the cast-in-place concrete foundations installed under the work of Section 03 3000. Confirm reinforcing steel has been held down below the top of the foundation by requisite 3 inches. Concrete foundation shall be level and finished smooth to receive columbarium assemblies. Provide latex modified skim coat or manually grind to establish smooth, level bed for installation of sleeve anchors, stainless steel stiffener plates, mounting brackets and structural components

C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Provide temporary bracing and scaffolding as required to erect columbarium assemblies. Maintain in place until built structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP - GENERAL

A. All columbarium units shall be pre-fabricated and assembled to the dimensions shown on

the Detailed Drawings, Elevations, Plans and approved Shop Drawings. B. Erect all components level and plumb. Correct or replace, as directed by the Owner’s

Representative, non-conforming masonry work at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Examine all Contract Documents as to requirements for the accommodation of work of

other trades and Contractors. Take every precaution to minimize cutting and patching. Deliver inserts and other anchorage items required to be cast into concrete in sufficient time to prevent any delay in such work. Closely coordinate the location and placement of such items.

D. Install no assembly component that has been damaged or defaced. Remove any such

component, if installed, and replace with an undamaged component, and bear all costs of this Work.

E. Set assemblies in accordance with Contract Documents and final Shop Drawings.

Provide anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments shown, specified or necessary to secure stonework in place in accordance with the best practices of the trade.

F. Protect all components from rain prior to, and during the installation thereof. G. Coordinate all cutting and patching of granite units required to fit to columbarium

assemblies. Provide assistance to unit masons during laying up work of granite. H. Provide protection against breakage and weather damage to all columbarium niche

installation, including coverings over the tops of niche walls wherever necessary to protect work at all stages of completion. Protect columbarium assemblies at all times when masons are not working on the walls. Apply tarpaulins or waterproof paper properly weighted to assure their remaining in place to protect masonry.



I. Do not start installation of columbarium assemblies without a clear idea of where in the

progress of the work to break for the day and an understanding of the time it will take to install rain and weather protections before departure for the day.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Set pre-assembled columbarium sections on the prepared cast-in-place concrete foundation

in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions. For surfaces of columbarium assemblies that are soiled, clean exposed surfaces in accordance with written instructions.

B. Lay up all columbarium units level and plumb, true on the concrete foundation and in

accordance with the detailed Shop Drawings. Install units using manufacturer’s recommended fasteners and anchorage.

C. Joints shall be mechanical and conform to the approved Shop Drawings. D. Make adjustments as the assemblies are erected.

3.05 STONE A. Be present on site when stone veneer and capstone components are installed. Any

condition where granite stone work does not conform to the needs of the columbarium niche system, report deficiencies to the Owner, replace the granite components and postpone completion of the work until substitute materials arrive.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. As follows:

1. Alignment: Maximum of 3 mm (1/8 inch) from true line.

2. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 0.8 mm (1/32 inch) maximum.

3. Variation from Plumb: 3 mm (1/8 inch) per 3000 mm (10 feet).

4. Maximum variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus 1.5 mm (1/16 inch)

3.07 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Field cutting and fitting of columbarium assemblies and components thereof are prohibited.

3.08 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Columbarium Assemblies

1. Remove and replace units and components that are broken, chipped, stained, bent or otherwise damaged. Replace in kind with new and whole, undamaged and pristine components.

2. Follow manufacturer's instructions for repair. In addition, the following will be required.



3.09 PROTECTION

A. Maintain protective boards, tarpaulins, coverings and devices as required to protect erected columbarium assemblies from damage by construction activities.

B. Provide protection without damaging completed work.


A. Item No. 10 7450.01 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES will be measured as a LUMP SUM, complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work including all connections to concrete foundations.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by payment item. Such price shall constitute full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the Work as described in this Section.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

10 7450.01 COLUMBARIUM ASSEMBLIES LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


13 1213 - 1 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL SYSTEM

SECTION 13 1213 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS





1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing and installing all fountain equipment and related items as indicated on the Contract Documents and/or as specified herein. Coordinate installation of fountain equipment items with the work of installing reinforced concrete slab, waterproofing, granite paving, granite walls and all miscellaneous items.



1. Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY 3. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 4. Section 31 2319 DEWATERING 5. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 6. Section 32 1400 GRANITE UNIT PAVING 7. Section 33 0000 SITE UTILITIES

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following related items are included herein and shall mean: 1. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 2. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

A-167-99: Stainless and heat resistant Chromium-Nickle Steel Plate, sheet & strip. A-276: Stainless steel bars and shapes.

A-123: Zinc (Hot-galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips.

A-153: Zinc coating (Hot-dip) on iron and steel hardware. A-307: Carbon steel externally threaded standard fasteners. A-500: Cold-formed Welded Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes.



ASTM B 221-93 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. ASTM B455-91 Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass) Extruded Shapes.

3. This installation shall comply with all applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following codes:

UPC: Uniform Plumbing Code UBC: Uniform Building Code NEC: National Electrical Code 4. Materials furnished hereunder shall, where applicable, comply with the latest

edition of applicable standard specifications published by the following organizations:

AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute AISI304 Stainless Steel Alloy Designation AWS: American Welding Society

D1.1 Structural Steel Welding and Full Seam Stainless Steel Welding ANSI: American National Standards Institute ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association 5. Provide labeled equipment certifying approval, as hereinafter specified, by the

following organization: UL: Underwriters Laboratories

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit, for the approval of the Owner’s Representative, all required Shop Drawings and Catalog Cuts, including but not limited to the following:

1. Water Fountain complete system including all water & electrical features listed under Part 2 - Materials.

B. No work shall be commenced by the Contractor until he has approval of the drawings in

writing from Owner’s Representative. Approval of these drawings will be general in character and shall not mean that the drawings have been checked so as to relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of or the necessity of furnishing materials and workmanship required by the plans and these specifications to achieve the design goals of creating a fully functioning fountain.

C. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner’s Representative a certificate of compliance by

the manufacturer for all materials purchased from the manufacturer. 1.06 APPROVAL

A. Before ordering any materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative, for approval, a schedule, showing makes, types, and trade designations of all equipment, valves, drains and appurtenances. All must be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to installation.

1.07 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall have a clear understanding of existing conditions of the site before submitting his bid, and shall be fully responsible for carrying out all site work required to



fully and properly execute the work of the Contract. Regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work, no claim for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of actual conditions inconsistent with those assumed.

1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. At a time designated by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall furnish the

services of a competent operator to instruct the Owner’s Representative in the maintenance and operation of all systems.

B. Upon completion of the work, furnish the Owner’s Representative, for his approval,

electronic copies of an operating manual containing approved Shop Drawings and Details, and written instructions relative to the care and operation of the equipment, all properly indexed and organized as PDF files. After Owner’s Representative's approval and revisions as directed, deliver five DVDs of the manual to the Owner’s Representative. Electronic files shall contain the following:

1. Table of contents. 2. Description of Fountain Operations.

3. Functional and sequential description of all systems 4. Listing of manufacturers. 5. Manufacturer's data where multiple model, type and size listing are included,

clearly and conspicuously indicating those that are pertinent to this installation: a. Description: Literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance

charts, technical data, etc. b. Operation; c. Maintenance, including complete troubleshooting charts; d. Parts list; e. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of recommended repair and

service companies; f. Guarantee data. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The intention of these specifications is to ensure that a single fountain equipment manufacturer provides a system with single source responsibility for the components of the fountain.

B. The contractor is to provide all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and services for

the proper installation of the fountain's mechanical and electrical systems. Mechanical and electrical system components shall be provided, installed and paid for under the work of this Section. Coordinate with the work of all other trades. See the Division 32 Sections that describe general and specific site improvements, for the provision and installation of all concrete, granite, waterproofing and stones.

C. All equipment and products in the fountain system shall be new and meet the standards

provided in but not limited to these specifications. GEORGIA FOUNTAIN COMPANY, INC. (GEFCO), 2513 Royal Place, Tucker, GA 30084, 770-934-3297, or approved equal,



to provide manufactured products which meet the qualifications and standards that are established in these specifications for the desired quality assurance. The model numbers shown are from GEORGIA FOUNTAIN COMPANY, INC.

D. Fountain Equipment Manufacturer's Responsibility:

1. The fountain equipment manufacturer shall provide proper engineering design that relates directly to the fountain system. This design shall include the mechanical (hydraulic) and electrical design, which shall include sizing, selecting, and assembling of the fountain pump systems, spray effects and the fountain pool equipment.

2. This contract shall include all piping, wiring, mechanical parts, labor and materials to create a fully operational water fountain. All portions on the water system shall be part of this contract. All electrical work from and including the electrical panel shall be part of this contract. The Owner shall provide electricity to the electrical panel. Contractor shall be responsible for all vault waterproofing.

E. Contractor’s Responsibility:

1. The fountain equipment manufacturer shall provide a factory representative for the initial start-up and adjustment of the fountain system, along with the orientation of proper operation and maintenance techniques to the maintenance staff. The factory representative’s site visit and services will be paid for by the Contractor.

F. The Owner will provide the following item for operation of the fountain:

1. 3/4-inch Incoming Cold Water supply at 50 psi maximum. 2. Backflow preventer. 3. 1-inch Incoming Power supply 120/240 volt, 1 phase, 60 amps.

G. Drawings and Submittals

1. The contractor shall obtain from the fountain manufacturer drawings showing the sizes, locations, and installation details of the interconnecting piping, fountain, pool equipment, and fittings.

H. Operating Instruction

1. At the time of completion, a period of not less than eight (8) hours shall be allotted by the Contractor for instruction to the operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all systems. All personnel shall be instructed at one time, the Contractor making all necessary arrangements with manufacturer's representatives to provide instruction, product literature and application guides for the user's reference.

2.02 FOUNTAIN PARTS

A. The equipment and materials specified in this Section shall be installed by the Contractor

in accordance with the fountain manufacturer's recommendation to form a complete fountain pumping system to produce the desired effects in the design statement below. 1. This fountain will consist of one water pipe input from the fountain sump to the

pump enclosure. There shall be a 2 inch suction line from the fountain sump to the pump enclosure. The pumping station shall return the water to the fountain



via four (4) 1-1/2 inch pipes to four pairs of eyeball jets and a 3 inch pipe to the first pair of eyeball jets in the fountain basin.

2. The electric controls shall be remotely located as directed by the Owner’s Representative and wired into the pump enclosure and the dual water sensor.

3. Pumping and mechanical systems to operate the fountain shall be pre-assembled. 4. Electrical controls shall also be pre-assembled. The electric controls shall be

remotely located as directed by the Owner’s Representative and wired into the same station. All electrically operated devices inside the station shall also be wired and connected to the control panel. All conduit penetrations through the station shall also be made, sealed and ready for conduit connections to the fountain.

5. Pumping Station (1 required): Select #ST443-75, with inside clear dimensions: 48 inches square x 36 inches high pre-fabricated, reinforced underground fiberglass pump station. Pumping, filtration and control equipment is engineered, factory tested, and preassembled with Items listed below. a. Grounding: Pump Station shall be provided with 3- ¾” x 10’ copperweld

ground rods in triad. Provide #6 grounding electrode conductor from Control panel to Grounding Rod Triad, to the copper water service and the concrete housekeeping pad reinforcing steel.

b. Vent Caps shall be GEFCO Select #PM701-40, 2 each. c. GEFCO Custom ST443-75 Fiberglass Enclosure:

i. 48" sq. fiberglass shell. ii. 48" sq. gel coated white lockable lid with piano hinges and

spring latch support. Lid shall have a pad lock hasp. iii. Gel coated interior - white. iv. (2) 3/4" Bulk Head Fittings, PVC, S x S v. (2) 2" Bulk Head Fitting, PVC vi. (1) 3" Bulk Head Fittings, PVC, S x S vii. (2) 4" Bulk Head Fittings, PVC, S x S viii. Anti-skid surface built into gel coat. ix. Built-in suction sump at 9” x 9”x 8”. x. Quantity = 1 each.

d. GEFCO Select #ST820 Convenience Outlet. i. Duplex outlet. ii. Quantity = 1 each.

e. GEFCO Select PM702-11 Ventilation Fan: i. 1/6 Hp 115/230 Volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz. ii. 2” PVC pipe connection. iii. Shall be capable of delivering 54 cu. Ft/min. @ 15HG. iv. Quantity = 1 each.

f. GEFCO Select PM701-40 Vent Caps: i. Cast iron construction. ii. 4” slip connection. iii. Quantity = 2 each.

g. GEFCO Select #PM502-02 Sump Pump Assembly: i. Cast iron motor and pump housing. ii. Water tight square neoprene. iii. Float operated mechanical switch. iv. Stainless steel fasteners and switch arm. v. 1-1/2" female N.P.T. connection.



vi. Quantity = 1 each. h. GEFCO Select #PM106-05 Filter Pump:

i. 2 Horsepower pump. ii. All cast thermoplastic construction. iii. Integral lexan clear cover basket strainer. iv. 2" suction. v. 2" discharge. vi. 75 GPM at 50 FH. vii. 230 V., 1 phase, 3450 RPM, 60 Hz. viii. Filter suction Manifold, PVC, Sch. 80 construction. ix. 3" log with (1) 3" line. x. (1) 3" Ball Valve, true union, PVC, S x S. xi. Quantity = 1 each.

i. Filter discharge assembly includes the following: ii. Filter discharge Manifold, PVC, Sch. 80 construction. iii. 2" log with (1) 2" and (4) 1-1/2" lines. iv. (1) 2" Ball Valve, true union, PVC, S x S. v. (4) 1-1/ 2" Ball Valve, true union, PVC, S x S. vi. (1) 2" Check Valve, true union, spring loaded, PVC, S x S. vii. Quantity = 1 each.

j. GEFCO Select #PM900-75 Cartridge Filter Assembly: i. 75 sq.ft. Cartridge filter. ii. Made of cycolac construction. iii. Provide with 75 sq.ft. replacement cartridge filter. iv. Quantity = 1 each.

k. GEFCO #PM800-07-M Water Control Manifold: i. Automatic Fill/Level Control Manifold. ii. Miscellaneous copper tube and fittings. iii. (1) 3/4" ball valves, bronze. iv. 1/2" water hammer arrestor. v. 3/4" hose bibb, bronze. vi. Quantity = 1 each.

l. GEFCO Select #PM1720 In-Line High Capacity Brominator: i. Made of all cycolac plastic. ii. With automatic dial feed. iii. NSF Listed. iv. 2" N.P.T. connection. v. Bromine Not Included.

vi. Quantity = 1 each. 6. Fountain Parts shall include the following and all other components to create a

fully functioning fountain meeting the design requirements and objectives described on the Drawings and as directed by the Owner’s Representative: a. GEFCO #PE102 Eyeball Fitting complete with:

i. Cast brass body with waterstop flange. ii. Brass or CPB 1" orifice eyeball, insert, lock ring and guide

bushing. iii. With extended nipple for granite protrusion. iv. Bonding screw. v. Brass or CPB companion flange. vi. 2" female N.P.S. connection.



vii. Quantity = 10 each. b. GEFCO #PE103 Pool Drain Fitting:

i. Cast brass body with waterstop flange. ii. 2" bronze plug with male connection. iii. Bonding screw. iv. 2" female NPT/NPS base connection. v. Quantity = 2 each.

c. GEFCO #PE107 Suction Sump: i. Hi-impact cycolac plastic body. ii. 8" diameter anti-vortex plate. iii. 2" N.P.T. female bottom connections. iv. 1-1/2" N.P.T. female side connections. v. Quantity = 2 each.

d. GEFCO #PE108E 12" sq. Anti-Vortex Plate: i. 12" x 12" stainless steel anti-vortex plate. ii. Quantity = 2 each.

e. GEFCO #PE1039-30P Slab Penetration for Equalizer Lines: i. Brass waterstop flange. ii. Bonding screw. iii. 18" long. iv. 3" diameter copper tube. v. Quantity = 4 each.

f. GEFCO Select #PE113-1295-3 Float Enclosed Valve and Overflow: i. Made of fiberglass and reinforced plastic. ii. Cast bronze chrome plated front frame. iii. Stainless steel or chrome plated brass cover. iv. Plate with circular or slotted outflow opening. v. Float valve made of delrin plastic. vi. Stainless steel fastened. vii. 3" PVC overflow drain connection. viii. 1/2" female N.P.T. water connection. ix. Quantity = 1 each.

2.03 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

A. GEFCO U.L. Listed and Labeled:

1. Electrical Distribution Load Center including:

2. 100 Amps, 8 space, 2 pole circuits maximum.

3. Outdoor rated.

B. 24 HR Time Clock: PUMP OPERATION 1. min. interval actuators. 2. 7 day skip-a-day feature. 3. 208/277 V power supply. 4. Outdoor rated. 5. 1 channel Electromechanical operation. 6. Quantity = 1 each.



2.04 COPPER PIPING A. Copper pipe shall be hard temper, seamless piping conforming to the requirements of

ASTM B-88; Federal Specification WW-7-799, Type K; sizes shall be as indicated on the Plans and indicated herein.

B. All fittings for copper piping shall be solder-joint copper or brass, conforming to U.S.A.

Standard B-16.18 and B-16.22, as approved by the Engineer. C. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-

socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded or solder-joint, and threaded ends.

D. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

E. Provide all necessary inserts, fasteners, clamps, rods, hangers, saddles, supports, anchor

bolts, nuts, washers, and steel plates and shapes as required to properly support all piping and equipment included under this section.

F. Supporting devices shall be as manufactured by Grinnell or equivalent, and

recommended for the application.

2.05 SEALANTS AND WATERPROOFING

A. Sealants shall be used to waterproof joints between fountain concrete, granite walls and fountain piping.

B. Preformed Joint Filler - Joint filler shall be of closed cell polyethylene foam in

conformance to AASHTO M153-65, Type I, Fed. Spec. HH-F-341F, Type II, Class A and ASTM D1752-67, Type I. Joint filler shall be fabricated with a strip off cap of the same material as filler, comparable to "Strip Off" filler distributed by A.H. Harris & Sons, Inc., Medfield, MA or equal approved by the Owner.

C. Bond Breaker - Backer rod shall be closed cell expanded polyethylene, Ethafoam as

manufactured by Dow Chemical or equal. Size of backer rod shall be the same as the width of the joint.

D. Joint Sealant - Sealant shall be VULKEM 116 as manufactured by Tremco or approved

equal, color black, suitable for continual immersion in water which meets Federal Specification TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C902 and shall be a sealing compound of polyurethane with a single component chemically curing material. Submit sample for color approval. Primer for sealant shall be by same manufacturer as sealant. Joint width shall be one-quarter inch. Minimum joint size is one-quarter inch by one-quarter inch. Width to depth ratio shall be equal for joints between 1/4” and 1/2”.

E. Fluid Applied Waterproofing shall be equal to Pool-Gard C®, Neo-Gard ® Division of

JONES-BLAIR® Company, Dallas, TX 75235, (800) 321-6588, www.neogard.com, or approved equal.

1. Pool-Gard C Coating Materials: a. Primer: 7740/7741 100% solids epoxy primer.



b. Elastomeric Coating: 7825/7821 polyurethane coating, black in color. c. Exterior applications exposed to UV, shall be topcoated with exterior

finish coat. d. Exterior Finish Coat: ACRYLITHANE™ series urethane enamel. Black

color. e. Sealant: as noted herein with proven compatibility with specified

waterproofing

F. Material Performance Criteria

1. Physical properties of cured elastomeric coating to be used on this project are:

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CURED FILM

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES TEST METHOD RESULTS

Tensile Strength ASTM D412 1,500 psi

Elongation ASTM D412 300% ASTM D412 300%

Permanent Set ASTM D412 20%

Tear Resistance ASTM D1004 160 pli

Water Resistance ASTM D471 2% ASTM D471 2%

MVT @ 20 mils ASTM E96 0.5 English

Taber Abrasion ASTM D4060 5 mg/1,000 cs-17

Shore A ASTM D2240 80 - 85 ASTM D2240 80 - 85

Adhesion ASTM D4541 400 psi ASTM D4541 400 psi

Weathering Resistance ASTM D822 Slight Chalking

Thermal Shock Alternate Heat/Cold

No Loss of Adhesion

G. Accessories

1. Flashing Tape: 6" wide Q-217 mastomeric tape manufactured by Q50 Incorporated or approved equal having a minimum thickness of 39 mils.

2.06 PIPING - PVC

A. All plastic PVC piping 3 inch and smaller, shall be PVC-200, Class-200, Type 1-1120, SDR 21, CS-256-63, 200-psi as manufactured by Cresline, Slone Triangle or approved equal. No substitutions of smaller pipe sizes will be permitted, but substitutions of larger sizes may be approved. All pipe damaged or rejected because of defects shall be removed from the site at the time of said rejections.

B. Fittings for PVC pipe, sizes 3 inch and smaller, shall be Schedule 80 solvent weld PVC

fittings in accordance with ASTM D 2467, as manufactured by Dura, Lasco, Spears or approved equal.

C. PVC solvent shall be NSF approved, for Type I and Type II PVC pipe, and Schedule 80

fittings. Cement is to meet ASTM D2564 and FF493 for potable water pipes. PVC solvent cement shall be used in conjunction with the appropriate primer.



D. Drain line piping 4 inch in size shall be PVC Schedule 40.

E. Clean-Outs shall be 3" White PVC Female Pipe Thread Spigot Cleanout Adaptor, Schedule 30. Plug covers shall be male threaded pipe, 3” dia.

2.07 WIRING FOR ELECTRIC VALVES

A. The contractor shall coordinate all electrical work with the Owner’s Electrician. All electrical work shall meet the standards of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.

B. The fountain mechanical work shall be provided essentially complete. The fountain

electrical panel shall be essentially complete however remotely located from the fountain mechanical work. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, wiring and conduit necessary to make the fountain mechanical work and fountain electrical panel operational. Provide all necessary wire conduits and run under pavement slab to complete the work as required. Size conduits appropriate to the devices powered.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF THE FOUNTAIN SYSTEM

A. The fountain component system shall be installed in compliance with the fountain system manufacturer's recommendations and codes that may apply. Coordinate installation of all components of the fountain mechanical system with the work described in the various Division 32 Sections of this Specification.

B. Minimum one day site visit by a representative of the fountain manufacturer shall be

provided during the construction phases of the project and prior to Substantial Completion. 1. Pre-construction meeting shall be arranged for the coordination of the trades

involved in the fountain installation. This allows for a detailed explanation of the suggested installation techniques and the sequence of the installation.

2. Final start-up and adjustment meeting is provided for the proper adjustments to be made to the fountain system to meet the performance levels established. It is also the time to orient the maintenance staff of the correct procedures in operating the equipment in the fountain system. Before the final arrival of the manufacturer's representative, all the following needs to be complete: a. Electrical connections need to be made and tested. b. Junction boxes need to be properly sealed. c. Fills/ drains/ anti vortex plates should be installed. d. Hydraulic piping and fittings need to be complete and tested for leaks,

repaired if necessary, and flushed clean. e. The fountain pool needs to be cleaned and filled to the correct water

depth.

C. Copper Pipe 1. Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipeline during installation.

Immediately prior to assembly, all pipes and fittings shall be cleaned. All unattached ends of pipe and fittings shall be plugged or capped pending



attachment of additional pipe or fittings. All lines shall be thoroughly flushed out prior to attachment of terminal fittings. Solder joints for copper tubing shall be prepared by cleaning the ends of the tubing and the inner surfaces of the fittings with steel wool until they are bright. The cleaned surfaces shall be given a thin coating of approved soldering flux, and the tubing end inserted into the fittings as far as possible. Heating and finishing of the joint shall be done in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the fittings, using solid string or wire solder composed of 95% tin and 5% antimony. The use of cored solder will not be permitted. Bends in copper tubing shall be made with a bending tool especially designed for the purpose. Threaded joints shall be lubricated and fastened with strap wrenches. The lubricant shall be a standard product specifically manufactured for the purpose intended. Threading and jointing operations shall be performed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Piping from the pump to the basin shall slope to allow the piping to be used in the wintertime as a drain for the piping and the upper basin into the lower basin. A ball valve shall be placed on the vertical section of pipe leading into the lower basin. This ball valve shall be opened in the wintertime and shall be in the closed position during fountain operation.

D. Plastic Piping

1. Plans are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be installed. Run and arrangement of piping shall be approximately located as indicated, subject to modifications as required to suit field conditions to avoid interference with work of other trades, or for proper, convenient and accessible location of all parts of piping systems. Due to the small scale of Plans, all required offsets, fittings, valves, drains, etc., may not be indicated. Refer to and carefully check all construction trades, and arrange work accordingly, furnishing all offsets, fittings, valves, drains, etc., required to meet such conditions.

E. Valves

1. Valves shall be installed as nearly as possible in the positions indicated within the Plans consistent with the convenience of operating the hand wheel or wrench. All valves shall be carefully erected and supported in their respective positions free from all distortion and strain or appurtenances during handling and installation. All material shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship and material, all debris and foreign material cleaned out of valve openings and seats, all operating mechanisms operated to check their proper functioning, and all nuts and bolts, checked for tightness. Valves that do not operate easily or are otherwise defective shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense. Valves shall not be installed with stems below the horizontal. Valves shall be set plumb and supported adequately in conformity with instructions of the manufacturer.

F. Check/ Test/ Start-Up/ Clean/ Adjust

1. Flushing: After all piping, valves, pumps, filters and related fountain equipment are in place and connected flush piping under a full head of water.

2. At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and sludge which may have accumulated by the operation of the system for testing.

3. Adjust flows to fountain displays.



4. Upon completion of all installation work, Contractor shall remove all leftover materials and equipment from the site in a safe and legal manner.

G. Testing

1. Prior to the completion of the work, the Contractor shall cause the entire fountain system to be tested in the presence of the Owner’s Representative. The test shall clearly demonstrate that each and every part of the system functions as specified or intended. Request the presence of the Owner’s Representative in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of testing. Testing shall be accomplished at the expense of the Contractor.

2. For pipe under pressure, apply and maintain a continuous and static water pressure of 60 psi as follows:

a. Main lines to pump chamber shall be tested for twelve (12) hours. b. Supply lines to fountain display shall be tested for two (2) hours. 3. Repair leaks resulting from tests. 4. Automatic and manual features of the fountain shall be tested for satisfactory

operation. The timer shall automatically operate the fountain system for not less than one-half (1/2) hour during which time each feature of the control system shall be tested. If unsatisfactory performance of the control system develops the condition shall be corrected and the testing procedures shall be repeated until satisfactory operation is obtained.

H. Thirty Day Operation at the completion of construction

1. As soon as the fountain structure has been completed and all mechanical and electrical equipment has been installed and tested, the fountain shall be placed in operation.

2. Prior to acceptance of the installation by the Owner’s Representative, demonstrate a thirty (30) day, fully automated, uninterrupted daily operation of not less than twelve (12) hours per day for all systems provided under this Section.

3. Contractor shall supervise the operation of the equipment and be responsible for the proper operation thereof and make no claim against the Owner for any damage to the equipment during such operation. Make such changes, adjustments, or replacements of equipment as may be required to make the same comply with the Specifications, or to replace any defective parts or materials.

4. The cost of electricity and water during the thirty (30) day operation period will be paid by the Owner. The Contractor shall pay for all operating costs for materials and normal operational supplies and for all costs resulting from system deficiencies.

5. Coordinate the thirty (30) day operation period with the Owner's Electrical Contractor.

I. Guarantee

1. The Contractor shall guarantee that any equipment found defective within one year of the final acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.

2. The guarantee does not extend to damage incurred through operation and maintenance by the Owner. The Owner shall assume full responsibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the fountain upon final acceptance.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the purchase of service contracts to extend through the guarantee period if the manufacturer's guarantee should expire within the designated guarantee period.





A. Item No. 13 1213.01 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL SYSTEM will be measured as a LUMP SUM, complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work. Also included in this pay item are the services of a factory representative for the initial start-up and adjustment of the fountain system. The Contractor shall include the transportation costs, one night of accommodations and professional services for a factory representative’s one-day visit to the Columbarium site.




4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

13 1213.01 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL SYSTEM LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION


31 0510- 1 SOILS & AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 0510 SOILS & AGGREGATES

FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies soil and aggregate materials to be used for earthwork and earth

moving activities, including but not limited to the following operations:

1. Excavation and filling 2. Trench excavation and filling 3. Rough grading 4. Pavement construction



Specifications:

1. Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 2. Section 32 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 3. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 4. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 5. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

D 421 Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants

D 422 Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Modified Effort D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes

2. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD): Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges



3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): T11 Material Finer than 75 um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by

Washing T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Soil Samples: Provide a suitable volume of each off-site and on-site soil and/or

aggregate material proposed for use on this Project. Deliver soil and aggregate products to the testing laboratory for review and analysis.

B. Test Reports: Submit the following:

1. Mechanical gradation (sieve analysis) of each soil and aggregate material proposed for use on this Project. Mechanical gradation shall be performed on off-site and on-site sources of materials using the same sieves as the materials specified. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with requirements of D 422 and D 2487.

2. Compaction characteristics in accordance with D698 and D1557.

1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Base Course: The layer placed between the subgrade or subbase course and surface

pavement in a paving system. B. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not

available from excavations. C. Rock: A sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge of mineral matter in place of such

hardness and texture that it can only be loosened and removed by ram hoe or explosives and cannot be effectively loosened or broken down by ripping or bucket excavation. Boulders encountered during construction that are greater in size than 3 cubic yards shall be considered Rock for purposes of unit price payment.

D. Soil: All earth materials, organic or inorganic, which have resulted from natural processes

such as weathering, decay, and chemical action of in situ rock or the deposition of unconsolidated material in which more than 35 percent by weight will pass a No. 200 sieve.

E. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials (under pavements, concrete foundations for walls, under

fountain and planter):

1. Material meeting ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT.

2. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb. (40.9 kg) as determined by ASTM D 1557.

3. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, construction debris, frozen material, roots, and stumps.



4. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 55 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

5. Material designated in the field by the Town or the testing laboratory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOURCE OF MATERIALS

A. Material shall be obtained from required on-site excavation, to the extent that suitable material is available, and from off-site sources, to the extent that suitable material is not available from on-site excavation.

2.02 BORROW

A. Provide approved borrow soil materials for site fills. Borrow may be from on-site sources provided that it meets the requirements of this Section. Borrow shall be from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from on-site excavations.

B. Borrow material shall contain salt levels less than 1.0 milliohms/cm as measured by

electrical conductivity (EC2) of a 1:2 soil-water suspension (Test minus sieve #4 material.). Borrow material with levels of salt in excess of this level will be considered unsuitable material and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Off-site borrow shall conform to ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, SW,

and SP, and be well graded, natural inorganic soil, meeting the following requirements:

1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than 4 inches maximum dimension.

2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be placed to form embankments and compacted to the specified densities in a reasonable length of time.

3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other materials which will corrode piping or other metal.

4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 pounds per cubic foot. 5. Material from excavation on the site may be used as borrow if it meets the above

requirements and is approved by the Town.

2.03 BACKFILL A. On-site material for use as backfill shall be natural, inorganic, granular soil, taken from

areas of excavation after stripping of topsoil. B. If on-site Unsatisfactory Soil Material is encountered on this site then remove and

stockpile for deep burial as noted herein.



C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials in Landscaped Areas: and any soils with rocks greater than 2 inches in diameter or length shall be placed at the perimeter of the in-ground cremain fields at depths below 24 inches vertical dimension from finished grade.

D. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials under pavements, concrete foundations, fountains, planters

and any soils with rocks greater than 4 inches in diameter or length shall be placed at depths 24 inches deeper than the aggregate bases for pavements, concrete foundations, fountains and planters.

E. Do not use any foreign matter, such as construction debris, trash, wood, roots, leaves,

sod, organic matter, or soft clay and silt in any location of this project. F. Backfill shall be clean, non-organic material, of non-swelling character, capable of being

readily compacted to form a solid, stable embankment. G. Pieces of bituminous pavement shall be excluded from the backfill unless their use is

expressly permitted by the Town, in which case they shall be broken up as directed.

H. Frozen Material: 1. Do not backfill with or on frozen materials. 2. Remove, or otherwise treat as necessary, previously placed material that has

frozen prior to placing backfill.

I. Wet Material: 1. Do not mechanically or hand compact material that is, in the opinion of the

Town, too wet. 2. Do not continue backfilling until the previously placed and new materials have

dried sufficiently to permit proper compaction. 2.04 SUBGRADE AND FILL SOILS UNDER PAVEMENTS AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. Subgrade within 24 inches of bottom of Base Course for pavements and Gravel Borrow for Concrete Structures: Soil classification groups GW, GP, SW, and SP in accordance with ASTM D2487. Side slopes of installed fill soil shall be no less than 2 feet horizontal to one foot vertical (2:1).

2.05 GRAVEL

A. Compacted gravel base for pavements shall be Dense Graded Crushed Stone, consisting

of inert angular material derived from a stone quarry. It shall be hard, durable stone and stone screenings, free from loam and clay, surface coatings, and plastic materials. Gradation shall conform to M2.01.7 and the following:

Sieve No. % Passing by Weight 2” (50 mm) 100 1-1/2” (37.5 mm) 70-100 ¾” (19.0 mm) 50-85 #4 (4.75 mm) 30-55 #50 (300 um) 8-24



#200 (75 um) 3-10 2.06 SAND BORROW

A. Coarse Sand for drainage pipe zone bedding shall conform to M1.04.1 of the Standard

Specification, as determined by AASHTO T 11 and T 27. 2.07 THREE-QUARTER INCH CRUSHED STONE

A. Three-quarter inch crushed stone shall consist of inert angular material derived from a

stone quarry that is hard, durable, washed stone, free of deleterious materials. Gradation shall conform to M2.01.4, and the following:

Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 1” (25 mm) 100 ¾” (19 mm) 90-100 ½” (12.5 mm) 10-50 3/8” (9.5 mm) 0-20 #4 (4.75 mm) 0-5

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TRANSPORT AND DELIVERY

A. The Contractor shall provide sufficient soil and aggregate material to complete the work of the Contract.

B. Locate, procure and deliver soil and aggregate materials sufficiently in advance of

earthwork and earth moving activities to meet Project schedules. C. Deliver soil and aggregate materials to the Project site in tarpaulin-covered trucks.

Stockpile in locations approved by the Town. D. Stockpiled soil and aggregate materials shall be protected from erosion and sedimentation

in accordance with the relevant provisions of Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL, of this Specification.

E. Stockpile soil and aggregate materials in accordance with Section 31 2213 ROUGH

GRADING. 3.02 NOTIFICATION

A. Notify the Owner when the soil and aggregate materials are scheduled for delivery and

schedule his/her attendance on site to witness delivery and stockpiling. Owner will inspect the soil and aggregate materials for conformance to the requirements of the Contract.



3.03 CLEANUP A. Cleanup shall be in accordance with the respective Division 31 Sections of this

Specification governing earthwork and earth moving operations.


4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT A. Item No. 31 0510.01 BORROW will be measured by the CUBIC YARD, complete-in-

place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

B. Item No. 31 0510.02 THREE-QUARTER INCH CRUSHED STONE will be measured

by the CUBIC YARD, complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

C. Item No. 31 0510.03 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE will be measured by the

CUBIC YARD, complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

D. Item No. 31 0510.04 SAND BORROW will be measured by the CUBIC YARD,

complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.




4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

31 0510.01 BORROW CUBIC YARD 31 0510.02 THREE-QUARTER INCH CRUSHED STONE CUBIC YARD 31 0510.03 DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE CUBIC YARD 31 0510.04 SAND BORROW CUBIC YARD

END OF SECTION


31 1100 - 1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

SECTION 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.


1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to clear and grub the turf within the limit of work, complete as indicated on the Contract Documents, as specified, and as follows.



1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

2. Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING

1.04 REFERENCES



1.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not interfere with use of the adjacent facilities. Maintain free and safe passage for the public along the adjacent public way.

B. Cease operations and notify Owner immediately if safety of adjacent structures, workers, or the general public appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structures and protect workers and general public. Do not resume operations until safety is restored.

C. Prevent movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent services, roadways and trees. Assume liability for such movement, settlement, or collapse. Promptly repair damage at no cost to the Town.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NONE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ON-SITE PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Before the start on the site of any work of this Section 31 1100, preceding the arrival of equipment, materials or vehicles to the site, and prior to the commencement of any clearing on the site, the Contractor shall arrange a preconstruction conference on the site with the Owner to review clearing and grubbing. Do no clearing without a clear understanding of existing conditions to be preserved. In addition to the responsibilities and penalties described in other Sections of the Specification, the Contractor shall be held responsible for any and all clearing, damage or destruction to plant material that results from the Contractor’s failure to understand or comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or failure to attend the preconstruction conference on site.

3.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A. Existing structures and utilities shall be suitably protected from damage, including but not limited to existing pavements and curbs and utility lines.

B. Provide and install erosion and sedimentation control at all utility structures as specified under Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL.

3.03 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. Review all requirements of Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL. All work of this Section 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING shall follow the erosion control principles identified in Section 01 5713.

3.04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Existing miscellaneous vegetation or extraneous debris not indicated on the Contract Documents or designated in the field by the Town to remain shall be cleared and grubbed.



A. Clearing and grubbing turf and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 31 1100.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING will be measured per SQUARE YARD, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.





4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

31 1100.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING SQUARE YARD

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


31 1413 - 1 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING

SECTION 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING






1.02 SUMMARY A. The work of this Section consists of stripping and stockpiling on-site topsoil for reuse as

specified elsewhere in this Specification.

1.03 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the

Specifications: 1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Section 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 3. Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Not Applicable

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform stripping and stockpiling operations in conformance with

rules, regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-installation Conference:

1. Before commencing stripping operations, meet with the Owner’s Representative and consultants. Review stripping and stockpiling procedures and responsibilities and requirements. Notify participants at least 7 working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the existing conditions of the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section.



1. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Owner and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

2. Provide a minimum 15 days notice to the Owner and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.

B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all

conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.

1.07 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED

A. Information in the Contract Documents relating to depth of topsoil to be stripped and

stockpiled, subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed.

B. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed

are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall examine them for himself during the bidding period. Compensation for unforeseen subsurface conditions shall be in accordance with the general provisions of the Contract.

1.08 PERMITS, CODES, AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification.


A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING of this Specification.

1.10 DEFINITIONS

A. Soil: All earth materials, organic or inorganic, which have resulted from natural processes

such as weathering, decay, and chemical action of in situ rock or the deposition of unconsolidated material in which more than 35 percent by weight will pass a No. 200 sieve.

B. Topsoil: The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vegetation

as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter. C. Unauthorized excavation: Removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or

dimensions without direction by the Owner. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Owner, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

D. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within building lines.



1.11 COORDINATION

A. Prior to start of earthwork the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Owner for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of stripping and stockpiling operations and proposed locations of stockpiles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The work of stripping and stockpiling shall be conducted at such locations, at such rates

of progress and in such a manner as will ensure the continued progress of the work, with a minimum inconvenience to the general public.

B. Strip existing topsoil to avoid integration of subsoil or subgrade material into stockpiles.

3.02 STRIPPING TOPSOIL

A. Stripping: Prior to starting general excavation, all topsoil shall be stripped to its full depth

and stockpiled in approved locations for later reuse. All stockpiled topsoil shall be protected from wind and water erosion as specified in Section 01 5713, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL. All stockpiled topsoil shall be tested for suitability as a component of planting soil as specified, performed and paid for in Section 32 9119, LANDSCAPE GRADING.

B. Contractor shall have the existing topsoil tested for reuse as a component of the planting

soils as specified in Section 32 9119, LANDSCAPE GRADING, and submit the results to the Owner for approval.

C. Contractor shall not remove existing topsoil from the contract limits of Work without the

written approval of the Owner. 3.03 STOCKPILING


Specification. 3.04 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

to maintain stable excavations.

3.05 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS

A. Surplus topsoil not required to complete site construction and unsuitable excavated materials shall, unless directed otherwise by the Owner, become the property of the



Contractor who shall remove such materials from the site and legally dispose of it at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.06 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING

A. The Contractor shall control the topsoil stripping and stockpiling operations on the site so

that the surface of the ground will properly slope to prevent accumulation of water in excavated areas and adjacent properties. The Contractor shall grade and ditch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from stockpiles.

3.07 DUST CONTROL

A. During the construction period, the Contractor shall take special measures including, but

not limited to, wetting down to control dust on site, in order to prevent annoyance/and or damage to adjacent property, whether public or private. Calcium chloride or any other chemical material shall not be used on stockpiles.

B. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to keep streets, over which equipment

and service for project travel, clean and free from dirt, dust, mud and debris resulting from construction operations. The actions taken shall meet the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

3.09 CLEANUP

A. At the end of all stripping and stockpiling operations and before acceptance of the work,

the Contractor shall remove all debris, rubbish, garbage, trash, and discarded material, from the site. He shall dispose of them in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The premises shall be left clean and presentable.



A. Item No. 31 1413.01 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING will be measured by the

CUBIC YARD, complete-in-place including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.




4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

31 1413.01 SOIL STRIPPING & STOCKPILING CUBIC YARD

END OF SECTION

Pine Haven Cemetery Columbarium Garden Burlington, MA

31 2213- 1 ROUGH GRADING

SECTION 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING





1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, equipment, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to

complete the earthwork which includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Rough grading. 2. Removal of surplus or unsuitable materials. 3. Dust control. 4. Frost protection. 5. Preparation of subgrade for slabs, pavements, and landscaping. 6. Compaction or decompaction procedures.



Specifications: 1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 4. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 5. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 6. Section 32 1313 REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT 7. Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (AGC):

Manual Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

D 1556 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method D 2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil In-Place by the Rubber

Balloon Method D 2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth) D 2937 Density of Soil In-Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method



D 3017 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)



A. In accordance with Section 00 3132 GEOTECHNICAL MONITORING AND

TESTING, of this Specification.

B. Quality Control for Areas of Subsoiling and Decompaction: 1. Prior to the spreading of planting soil, the Contractor shall demonstrate to

Owner’s Representative that the depth of subsoiling has been met in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Contractor shall verify level and depth of soil decompaction using a shovel and a penetrometer. In locations as directed by the Owner’s Representative, dig holes 3-inches deep in the surface of the subsoil and test the bottom of the holes to depth of 3 inches with penetrometer, recording the dial gauge reading. Incrementally test the subsoil every three inches of increasing depth by shovel and penetrometer until the full specified thickness of subsoiling and decompaction has been verified. Record points where full depth subsoiling and decompaction have not been attained. Repeat testing operation at representative locations of the construction site as determined by the Owner’s Representative to verify specification requirements have been met.

2. In all areas where penetrometer testing shows specified depths of subsoiling have not been met, the Contractor shall perform remedial subsoiling to the specified depths.

3. Following the work of decompacting planting soil and prior to any work of seeding or planting, test planting soil and underlying subsoil with the penetrometer in locations as directed by the Owner’s Representative.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction. B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site prior to the start of

excavation and filling. 1. Before commencing rough grading, meet with representatives of Owner and

consultants and other concerned entities. Review rough grading and general earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements. Notify participants at least three working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.

2. Determine locations for penetrometer testing of existing conditions. C. Compliance: Comply with local safety regulations and with provisions of "Accident

Prevention in Construction" published by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.




A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the existing conditions of the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING. 1. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by

the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

2. Provide a minimum 48-hours' notice to the Owner and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.

B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all

conditions affecting work under this Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.

C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as

required for his own information.

1.08 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A. Information in the Contract Documents relating to subsurface conditions, natural

phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed.

B. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be performed

are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall examine them for himself during the bidding period. Compensation for unforeseen subsurface conditions shall be in accordance with the general provisions of contract.


A. Comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the Owner of Burlington and

the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the project site. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Comply with the provisions of the Manual for Accident Prevention in Construction of the

Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., and the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, United States Department of Labor.

C. The Contractor shall procure and pay for all permits and licenses required for the

complete work specified herein and shown on the Drawings. D. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct any street or sidewalk without written

permission from authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall so conduct his



operations as to interfere as little as possible with the use ordinarily made of roads, driveways, or other facilities near enough to the work to be affected thereby.


A. Benchmarks: The Contractor shall maintain and/or reestablish benchmarks and survey monuments necessary for the work of these Contract Documents and as shown in the Contract Documents or found to exist on the site to provide a base reference for the construction. Replace any which may become destroyed or disturbed. The Contractor shall employ and pay all costs for a registered Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor who is licensed within the jurisdiction of the project site to lay out all lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings, and as necessary or required for the construction.


A. Observe all rules and regulations governing the respective utilities in executing work

under this Section. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to: streets, curbs, paving, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private property. Protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor

shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.

C. Buried structures, utility lines, and the like, including those which project less than 18

inches above grade, which are subject to damage from construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of Project.

D. Locate and mark underground utilities to remain in service before beginning the work.

Protect all existing utilities to remain during operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. When an active utility line is exposed during construction its location and elevation shall

be plotted on the Record Drawing by the Contractor and both the Owner’s Representative and the Utility Owner notified in writing.

F. Provide barricades, fences, lights, signs, and all other safety devices required for the

protection of the public. G. No work shall be done in the Gas line Easement.



1.12 DEFINITIONS A. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase course and surface pavement in a

paving system. B. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not

available from excavations. C. Embankment: Any area on the site where the Contractor is required to raise grades to

proposed subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predetermined elevation and cross section.

D. Excavation: The removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse of

the material on site as Backfill, Fill or Ordinary Borrow material as it conforms to these specifications or disposal of materials removed.

E. Finish Grade: Final grade elevations indicated on the Drawings. Spot elevations shall

govern over proposed contours. Where not otherwise indicated, project site areas shall be given uniform slope between points for which finished grades are indicated or between such points and existing established grades. No ponding of surfaces shall be allowed due to lack of improper pitches across surfaces that will not allow proper drainage to occur.

F. Rough Grading: The work required to bring the sub-grade to within the specified and

detailed depths below finished grade to compaction levels specified in this Section. G. Soil: As defined under Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR

EARTHWORK. H. Sub-grade: Existing native soil in cut, on-site borrow in fill conditions, or imported soils

in fill conditions, all of which meet the requirements of this Specification, upon which planting soils or granular pavement base are placed shall be known as sub-grade.

I. Surplus Materials: On-site materials not used during the course of construction. J. Subsoiling: The vertical and lateral fracturing of compacted subsoil material to full depth

of compaction through deep ripping and de-compaction to restore soil porosity and permeability, to aid in infiltration of water, and to promote root growth.

K. Structures: Footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface.

L. Topsoil: The upper layer of the existing soil profile which is supporting the growth of

vegetation as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter.

M. Unauthorized Excavation: Removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or

dimensions without direction by the Owner’s Representative. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Owner’s Representative, shall be at the Contractor's expense.



N. Unclassified excavation: Removal of materials encountered when establishing required grade elevations to the depths and extents shown on the Contract Documents. Unclassified excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions.

O. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: As defined under Section 31 0510 SOILS AND

AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK. P. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within building lines.

1.13 COORDINATION A. Prior to start of any earthwork related activities the Contractor shall arrange an on-site

meeting with the Owner’s Representative for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements.

B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner’s

Representative prior to start of rough grading and general earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing. 1. In the event that the Contractor does not notify the Owner’s Representative prior

to the start of rough grading and general earthwork operations and inspections and tests are not made or performed by the Owner’s testing agents, the Owner’s Representative may require the Contractor to remove all earthwork performed without the necessary inspections and replaced under the required supervision, review, inspections or tests at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed

to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Soils and aggregates shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK, of this Specification, including but not limited to: 1. Borrow 2. Fill 3. Gravel Base 4. Crushed Stone 5. Sand



PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

A. Work defined as excavation and filling shall be specified, performed, permitted and paid for under the work of Section 31 2300, EXCAVATION AND FILLING, of this Specification.

3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Work defined as trenching shall be specified, performed, permitted and paid for under the

work of Section 31 2333, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING, of this Specification. 3.03 STRIPPING, SCREENING, AND STOCKPILING OF TOPSOIL

A. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil shall be as specified under the work of Section 31

1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING of this Specification. 3.04 PREPARATION

A. Conduct Pre-installation Conference in accordance with the requirements of this Section. B. Protect structures, utilities, pavements base, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

C. Protect subgrade and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide

protective insulating materials as necessary. D. Purchase, provide and install erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement

of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. Erosion control measures shall be as specified in Section 01 5713, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL, and provided, installed and paid for under the Work of this Section, 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING.

E. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost utilizing

thermal blankets, ground heating hoses or such measures to insure exposed soil bearing capacity has been preserved. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent material.

3.05 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpiling: No soils generated from any earthwork activity shall be deposited or

stockpiled at any time so as to endanger portions of a new or an existing structure, either by direct pressure or indirectly by overloading banks contiguous to the operation. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Material, if stockpiled, shall be stored so as not to interfere with the established sequence of the construction. If there is not sufficient area available for stockpiling within the limits of the project, the Contractor will be required to furnish his own area for stockpiling, and for moving the material back and forth from the storage area, at no additional cost to the Owner. No excavation shall



be deposited within existing tree protection zones. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water away from existing drainage structures or wetland areas. Cover stockpiles to prevent wind-blown dust. The Contractor shall provide and install all erosion control specified under the Section 01 5713, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL.

B. Throughout the course of the work the Contractor shall provide and maintain all erosion

control systems for stockpiled materials as specified in the Section 01 5713, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL.


A. The Contract Documents indicate layout alignments and grade elevations establish the

lines and grades in conformity with the Drawings. The Owner’s Representative, however, may make such adjustments in the field in grades and alignments as are found necessary in order to avoid interference with any special conditions encountered.

B. Spot elevations shall govern over proposed contours. Where not otherwise indicated,

project site areas shall be given uniform slopes between points for which finished grades are indicated or between such points and existing established grades. In the event the Drawings do not provide for positive drainage in all locations, notify the Owner’s Representative immediately.

C. Establish and maintain suitable stakes over all areas to be graded as directed, specified or

required. Maintain sufficient reference points at all times during construction to properly perform the contract installation.

3.07 EXCAVATION

A. The work of excavation of soils shall be specified under Section 312300.

3.08 UNSATISFACTORY SUBGRADE

A. When exposed subgrade material is soft, yielding or otherwise Unsatisfactory Soil

Material, the excavation shall be carried to a depth designated by the Owner’s Representative, the unsatisfactory soil material removed to the extent required by the Owner’s Representatives, and replaced with approved satisfactory soil materials, which shall be compacted in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

B. Unsuitable or surplus material shall be disposed of offsite. C. In the event that boulders, rock, or bedrock are encountered in the course of rough

grading and this discovery will effect completion of the work shown on the Drawings, notify the Owner’s Representative immediately. Remove boulders and rock less than one and one-half cubic yards in accordance with the requirements of Unclassified Excavation as specified in Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING. Removal of boulders greater than one and one-half cubic yards shall be paid for under the work of Section 31 2300.



3.09 DECOMPACTION OF SOILS

A. General: 1. All in-place soil within the limit of turf and landscape areas that has been subject

to any vehicular traffic, equipment storage or material stockpiling during the performance of this Contract shall be decompacted to a depth of 12 inches in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.

B. Decompaction Operations:

1. Vertically fracture all exposed subsoil material within the Limits of Work through deep turnover and decompaction, restoring soil porosity and permeability and aiding infiltration and reducing runoff. Restrict fracturing of subsoil to those areas of turf and planting. Fracture the subsoil to a depth of 12 inches.

2. Effective fracturing of compressed subsoil material is achieved only when the soil material is moderately dry to moderately moist. Perform subsoiling only when soil has suitable moisture content as described in this Specification.

C. Decompaction of Planting Soil:

1. Spreading the planting soil can cause compaction of the previously ripped subsoil and the planting soil. The second phase of the operations shall be de-compaction of the planting soil by deep ripping through the full layer of the planting soil into the top half of the restored subsoil. Contractor shall demonstrate that his/her protocols for re-spreading topsoil will not cause extensive compaction.

2. If required by the Owner’s Representative, this second phase of de-compaction mitigates the partial re-compaction which occurs during the heavy process of topsoil spreading and grading.

3. Prior to deep ripping and de-compacting the site, all construction activity, including access by construction equipment, material storage, site cleanup and trafficking shall be completed and the site closed off to further disturbance. In the event of the operations of deep ripping and de-compaction are interrupted by rain, proceed no further until the subsoil has dried and the palmed roll crumbles in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

3.10 COMPACTION

A. Rough grading, filling and compaction work shall be performed by tracked vehicles or as

follows. Wheeled vehicles shall be low ground pressure wheeled vehicles. LGP vehicles shall have ground pressure no greater than 4 pounds per square inch.

B. Subgrade compaction shall be tested by the testing laboratory before proceeding further. C. All fill is to be placed "in-the-dry", to which end dewatering may be required. Spreading

and drying of each layer may also be required. Dewatering, as necessary, shall be a part of the work of this Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING, and shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.



D. Conversely, if the testing laboratory determines that the fill is too dry for proper compaction, water shall be added to provide the specified optimum moisture content, as necessary for proper compaction.

E. Compaction of each lift shall be as specified herein and as determined by ASTM Test,

Designation D1556. Fill shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts no thicker than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Compact fill to the required density as specified in this Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING. Maximum dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D. The following percentages of minimum to maximum dry densities shall be achieved for fill materials or prepared subgrades. Under paved surfaces and in lawn and planting areas:

Minimum Maximum 1. All fills 95% 98% 2. Top twelve inches of subgrades in cut 95% 98% 3. Fills within lawn and planting areas to within 18 inches of finished subgrade 82% 87% 4. Fills within lawn and planting areas in top eighteen inches of finished grade 85% 87%

Maximum dry density for planting soils shall be determined in accordance with ASTM

D698. The preceding percentages of minimum to maximum dry densities shall be achieved for fill materials or prepared subgrades.

F. In the case of lawn and planting areas, compaction requirements for subgrades and fills

shall be considered minimums and maximums within the density percentages called for, and any over-compaction of subgrades or fills which would be detrimental to lawn or planting objectives shall be corrected by subsoiling operation as specified in this Section.

G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative 3 days in advance when the

rough grades are established and ready for formal inspection. No planting soil shall be placed on rough grades before inspection by the Owner’s Representative.

3.11 ROUGH GRADING

A. When filling is required by the work of this Section, all areas to be filled shall be free of

vegetation, topsoil, wet materials, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, deleterious materials, construction debris, refuse, compressible or decayable materials and standing water prior to placing fills. Do not place fill when fill materials or material below it are frozen. No fill materials containing ice or frozen lumps shall be used.

B. Rough grading shall include the shaping, trimming, rolling, and refinishing of all surfaces

of the subgrade and base courses, shoulders, and earth slopes in preparation for the final installation of pavements, final placement of planting soils and miscellaneous work of



site improvements as shown on the Drawings and as specified in other Sections of this Specification. The rough grading of shoulders and sloped areas may be done by machine methods. As noted herein, work shall be performed by tracked vehicles or wheeled vehicles with low ground pressure tires. Traffic of men and equipment across soil subgrade areas shall be prohibited following excavation to the required lines and grades. 1. Backfill and base courses to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. When thickness of compacted backfill or base course is 6 inches or less, place

materials in a single layer. 3. When thickness of compacted backfill or base course exceeds 6 inches, place

materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.

C. If, during the progress of the Work, any pipe, drain or other construction is damaged due

to operations under this Contract, the Contractor shall repair all damage at no additional cost to the Owner and restore damaged areas to their original conditions.

D. Do all other cutting, filling and grading to the lines and grades indicated on the

Drawings. Grade evenly to within the dimensions required for grades shown in the Contract Documents and as specified herein. Fill shall be left in a compacted state at the end of the workday and sloped to drain.

E. Slope grades to direct water away from walls and structures to prevent ponding. Rough

grade to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. 2. Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.05 foot.

F. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent lateral

movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches wide of acceptable soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase course and base course layer.

G. The Contractor shall bring all areas to grades as shown Drawings. The Owner’s

Representative, however, may make such adjustments in grades and alignments as are found necessary to avoid special conditions encountered.

H. Creating stable earth slopes is an essential aspect of this Contract. Coordinate the work

of rough grading on slopes with the relevant provisions of Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING of this Specification. 1. Make no slopes greater than 2:1 (2 feet horizontal to one foot vertical). 2. For slopes less steep than 3:1 filling and rough grading shall conform to the

following protocols. a. Prevent stormwater from washing over the crest of the slope by installing

interceptor trenches in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL of this Specification.

b. Contractor shall rough grade soils to shape and form fills so that final grades of fill soils are congruent to the finish grade shown on the Drawings. Take care to avoid over compaction of the subgrade and fill soils.

c. Verify that the existing, in situ soils drain freely and have been properly loosened by subsoiling operations.



d. Having verified that the existing, in situ soils have not been overly compacted, scarify exposed surfaces to a depth of 6 inches.

e. Place fills in lifts no greater than 6 inches maximum and compact each lift to the specified compaction density before placing next lift.

f. Place fills in horizontal lifts only. g. Test soils for compaction levels as slopes are built. h. Upon achieving subgrade slopes, track the rough landform. Tracking

shall consist of traversing the slope with cleated tracks so that cleat indentations are pressed into the exposed soil. Tracks shall be generally horizontal, following contours of the landform.

i. Tracking shall not be construed to be used for slope compaction. Its sole purpose is to provide indentations in the slope to reduce soil erosion prior to the final placement of planting soils.

j. For landform development in areas too small for tracked equipment create horizontal indentations by hand tools.

k. Spread planting soils in accordance with Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING. In the event that spreading planting soil is delayed for more than one week, stabilize exposed subgrade on slopes 3:1 and shallower in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 5713.

3. For slopes steeper than 3:1 filling and rough grading shall conform to the above stated protocols with the following exception: a. In lieu of final tracking of rough graded soil surface, contractor shall

create steps in the subgrade slope to create horizontal terraces approximately 12 inches wide. Steps may be either mechanically shaped using plows, harrows or disking machines or formed by hand.

b. The surfaces of the steps shall generally slope back into the hillside. c. Spread planting soils in accordance with Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE

GRADING. d. In the event that spreading planting soil will be delayed for more than

one week, defer step construction work until time of landscape grading work. In this event stabilize exposed subgrade on 2:1 temporary slopes in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 5713.

I. No rubbish of any description shall be allowed to enter fill material. Such material shall

be removed from the site. J. Wherever streets, lawns or other items contained within or outside the Limit of Work

Lines have been excavated in fulfilling the work required under this Contract, the Contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary to bring finish surfaces level with the existing adjacent surfaces. All work shall be installed to match the existing conditions in accordance with the governing authority. Notify the proper authorities prior to restoring surfaces outside the Limit of Work Lines.

K. Placed fill materials that become disturbed shall be regraded and re-compacted. Fill

materials that become contaminated shall be removed and replaced, as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

L. Contractor shall clean the subgrade of all stones greater than 2 inches and all debris and

rubbish. Such material shall be removed from the site, not raked to the edges and buried. Notify the Owner’s Representative that the subsoil has been cleaned and request his/her



attendance on site to review and approve subgrade conditions prior to spreading additional specified material over the subgrade.

3.12 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENTS

A. Base courses for paving and the spreading, grading, and compaction methods employed

shall conform to standard requirements for usual base course of this type for first class road work, and the following:

1. Massachusetts Highway Department Specifications Section 402, DENSE

GRADED CRUSHED STONE FOR SUB-BASE

B. Compaction of aggregate base courses shall be to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D.

C. Width of base courses shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement surface, if

continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend a distance of at least twice the base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported.

D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 inches thick, compacted

measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density.

1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level.

2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels.

3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 inches measured by means of a 10 feet long straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted.

E. Subgrade and base courses shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials

shall not be permitted to become mixed with subgrade or base material. Materials spilled outside pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired.

F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, softened, or

dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation.


A. Surplus excavated or surplus off-site borrow materials not required to complete site

construction and unsuitable excavated materials shall, unless directed otherwise by the Owner’s Representative, become the property of the Contractor who shall remove such materials from the site and legally dispose of it at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.14 FROST PROTECTION

A. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may be expected, unless footings or slabs can be poured immediately after the excavation has been completed. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete is delayed.

B. Completed foundations that have not been backfilled shall be protected from freezing by

temporary additional earth cover, insulating blankets, heaters, or other methods acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

C. Frozen material shall not be placed as fill or backfill.

D. No work shall be installed on frozen ground.

E. Should protection fail, remove frozen materials and replace with concrete or gravel

borrow as directed by the Owner’s Representative at not additional cost to the Owner.

3.15 DUST CONTROL

A. During the construction period, the Contractor shall take special measures including, but not limited to, wetting down to control dust on site, in order to prevent annoyance/and or damage to adjacent property, whether public or private. Calcium chloride or any other chemical material may not be used on subgrades of areas to be seeded or planted.

B. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to keep streets, over which equipment

and service for project travel, clean and free from dirt, dust, mud and debris resulting from construction operations. The actions taken shall meet the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before acceptance of finished grade, remove finished surfacing or

planting soil, backfill with additional soil material, recompact and reconstruct surfacing, planting soil and install new plant material or turf as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

D. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.17 CLEANUP

A. At the end of all earthwork and rough grading operations and before acceptance of the

work, the Contractor shall remove all debris, rubbish, garbage, trash, and discarded



material, from the site. He shall dispose of them in a manner satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative. The premises shall be left clean, presentable, and satisfactory.



A. The work of preparation, stockpiling of soils, compaction and decompaction of soils,

removal of surplus materials, frost protection, dust control, protection, clean up, providing penetrometers for use by the Owner, and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 31 1413.01 ROUGH GRADING will be measured PER CUBIC YARD

performed as specified herein, including all labor and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work of rough grading of all soil materials specified under the work of Section 31 0510 SOIL AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK.




4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

31 2213.01 ROUGH GRADING CUBIC YARD

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


31 2300 - 1 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

SECTION 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods

necessary to complete the earthwork which includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Unclassified excavation. 2. Filling and compaction. 3. Removal of surplus or unsuitable materials. 4. Dust control. 5. Excavation, filling and grading around trees to remain. 6. Frost protection. 7. Preparation of subgrade for footings, foundations, and landscaping.



Specifications: 1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Section 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 4. Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 5. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 6. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (AGC):

Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

D 1556 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method D 2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon

Method D 2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth) D 2937 Density of Soil In-Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method



D 3017 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)




Specification.





Specification.

1.08 PERMITS, CODES, AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification.


A. Benchmarks: The Contractor shall maintain and/or reestablish benchmarks and survey monuments necessary for the work of these Contract Documents and as shown in the Contract Documents or found to exist on the site to provide a base reference for the construction. Replace any which may become destroyed or disturbed. The Contractor shall employ and pay all costs for a registered Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor who is licensed within the jurisdiction of the project site to lay out all lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings, and as necessary or required for the construction.



Specification.

1.11 DEFINITIONS A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification. 1.12 COORDINATION


Specification.



1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Soils and aggregates shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK, of this Specification, including but not limited to: 1. Borrow 2. Fill 3. Gravel Base 4. Crushed Stone 5. Sand

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION


Specification.


A. Slope all subgrade surfaces to drain. Rough and fine grading shall be in accordance with the work of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING and Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING of this Specification.

3.03 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION

A. The work of excavation shall be conducted at such locations, at such rates of progress and

in such a manner as will ensure the continued progress of the work, with a minimum inconvenience to the general public.

B. All material encountered during excavation shall be unclassified excavation and shall

include the removal of boulders up to one and one-half cubic yards, earth, rock, concrete, covered pavements, abandoned utilities, abandoned foundations and all miscellaneous materials encountered as required for excavation. The sequences of all excavation operations shall be such as to ensure the most efficient reuse of acceptable excavated borrow materials for particular improvement application. Acceptable materials shall be used or stockpiled for later use in backfill and subgrade preparation. Unsatisfactory soil materials and boulders greater than one and one-half cubic yards in size shall be removed form the site and said removal paid for under the work of this Section.



C. Excavate all materials to the elevations, dimensions and form as shown on the Drawings and as specified for the construction of drainage structures, utilities, lawn and site improvements necessary for the completion of the utilities and site work. Excavate to elevations indicated or required within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot.

D. For excavation for construction of walls, drainage structures or footings: Extend

excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

E. Unauthorized Excavation: Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall

footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. 1. Any excavation which has been carried, through error, beyond specified depths

or dimensions, shall be backfilled by the Contractor at his own expense with compacted gravel borrow, with concrete, or with other material as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

F. Hand Excavation: In general, machine excavation will be permitted with the exception of

work in the vicinity of trees to remain, existing utilities and excavation of pipe bells which will be hand work.

G. Inspection of Excavation for Built Structures: After completion of the excavation and

prior to commencement of foundations, footings and concrete slab construction, the excavation will be inspected by the Owner’s Representative to ensure that foundation elevations have been reached.

H. Compaction Levels following General Site Excavation: At the completion of excavation

and before placing any aggregate base or fills, ensure subgrades have compaction levels required for placed fills as required hereafter, by proof-rolling to achieve specified compaction levels or ripping and re-compacting as required hereinafter.

I. When test results determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, stop

excavation work immediately and contact the Owner’s Representative to determine whether or not to continue excavation work and replace the unsatisfactory soil material with compacted backfill or fill material as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

J. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the

Contract provisions for changes in Work. K. Reconstruct subgrade damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,

or construction activities, as directed by the Owner’s Representative. 3.04 STOCKPILING


Specification.



3.05 CONTAMINATED MATERIAL A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification.

3.06 UNSATISFACTORY EXISTING SUBGRADE OR ENCOUNTERED BEDROCK A. When the unsatisfactory soils materials (defined under Section 31 0510 SOILS &

AGGREGATES) and boulders greater than one and one-half cubic yards are encountered they shall be removed and disposed of off-site in a legal manner. Payment for removal of said materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

B. When the concrete foundation must be placed on solid rock, the rock shall be excavated

to a firm surface, either level stepped or serrated. When disintegrated rock or boulders are encountered, the rock shall be excavated to a depth below the bottom of the proposed structures as directed by the Owner’s Representative and replaced with approved gravel or crushed stone material, thoroughly compacted, or a lower elevation for the bottom of the structure shall be established.

C. When the concrete structure is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock, special

care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. If the surface upon which the structure is to rest is disturbed, it shall be re-graded and re-compacted to the extent directed by the Owner’s Representative.

D. After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s

Representative and no concrete shall be placed or other installations made until the depth of the excavation and the character of the foundation material has been approved.

3.07 GRAVEL BASE COURSE FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. Gravel and/or crushed stone base course for concrete structures and the spreading,

grading, and compaction methods employed shall conform to standard requirements for base course of this type for first class concrete work, and the following: 1. Massachusetts Highway Department Specifications Section 150

EMBANKMENTS.

B. Compaction of aggregate base shall be to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D.

C. Width of base shall be greater than 12 inches plus the width of the concrete base of the

structure. D. Aggregate material shall be applied in lifts less than or equal to 6 inches thick, compacted

measure. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. E. Special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. If the surface upon

which the structure is to rest is disturbed, it shall be re-graded and re-compacted to the extent directed by the Owner’s Representative.



3.08 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

A. Proceed with concrete construction in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE of this Specification as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

3.09 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION


Specification and the following. B. Remove all concrete formwork, temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting prior to

commencing with filling, backfilling and compaction operations. Burial of temporary formwork, temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting is strictly prohibited. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative when excavation is ready for formal inspection. Filling and backfilling shall not be started until conditions have been approved by the Owner’s Representative.

3.10 BACKFILLING OF STRUCTURES

A. All requirements for description, placement, compaction and spreading of fill materials as

specified in this Section 31 2300, EXCAVATION AND FILLING, shall be applicable to backfilling operations for structures.

B. Approvals Prior to Backfilling: Do not commence backfilling operations for structures

until formwork has been stripped from concrete structures and all piping and other underground utilities or structures have been installed, tested and approved, and the locations of all pipe and appurtenances have been recorded.

C. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is

removed. D. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade elevation in

preparation to receive planting soil or pavement base.

3.11 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations.



Specification.

3.13 FROST PROTECTION




3.14 DUST CONTROL


3.15 CLEANUP

A. At the end of all excavation, filling and grading operations and before acceptance of the

work, the Contractor shall remove all debris, rubbish, garbage, trash, and discarded material, from the site. He shall dispose of them in a manner satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative. The premises shall be left clean, presentable, and satisfactory.



A. The work of preparation, stockpiling of soils, compaction and decompaction of soils,

removal of surplus materials, frost protection, dust control, protection, clean up, providing penetrometers for use by the Owner, and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 31 2300.01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION will be measured PER CUBIC

YARD performed as specified herein, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work of excavation and any removal and disposal off site thereof.

C. Item No. 31 2300.02 FILLING will be measured PER CUBIC YARD performed as

specified herein, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work of filling, placement and compaction of soils and aggregates. Soils and aggregates are specified and paid for under Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGRATES FOR EARTHWORK.

D. Item No. 31 2300.03 REMOVAL OF UNSATISFACTORY SOIL MATERIALS will be

measured PER LUMP SUM performed as specified herein, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work of removal and disposal off site in a legal manner.

E. Item No. 31 2300.04 REMOVAL OF BOULDERS GREATER THAN 1-1/2 CUBIC

YARDS will be measure PER LUMP SUM performed as specified herein, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work of removal and disposal off site in a legal manner.






4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

31 2300.01 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION CUBIC YARD 31 2300.02 FILLING CUBIC YARD 31 2300.03 REMOVAL OF UNSATISFACTORY SOIL MATERIALS LUMP SUM 31 2300.04 REMOVAL OF BOULDERS > 1-1/2 CUBIC YARDS LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION


31 2319 - 1 DEWATERING

SECTION 31 2319 DEWATERING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. All Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of General

Conditions and Special Conditions, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for


1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods

necessary to ensure that landforms, site improvements and all built structures are constructed “in the dry”. Dewater the site to accomplish the work of this Contract.



1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 3. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 4. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 5. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 6. Section 31 5000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 7. Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING

1.04 REFERENCES


1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD): Specifications Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 2. Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (AGC): Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Dewatering Plan: Develop dewatering plan for review and coordination with the Owner

and the Owner’s Representative, detailing the location of water control activities, equipment and discharge points.


A. Monitor water control devices, methods and systems during construction, including:



1. Groundwater levels in excavations. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Perform dewatering work to comply with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-installation Conference: In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING conduct conference at Project site prior to the start of excavation and filling to discuss Contractor’s approach to dewatering.

C. Compliance: Comply with local safety regulations and with provisions of "Accident

Prevention in Construction" published by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.

1.08 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND AVAILABLE DATA

A. Do not interrupt existing drainage patterns on the site without a clear understanding of its effects on the flow of water into, through and out of the site.

B. The Contractor shall understand all factors that control water on the Project site to

ensure short-term stability during construction of the work of this Contract and for the long-term stability of the site and all structures built under the work of this Contract.

C. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and

all conditions affecting work under this Section 31 2319 DEWATERING. Barring unforeseen conditions agreed upon by the Owner after the fact, no claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.


A. Comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the Owner of Burlington and

Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the project site. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Comply with the provisions of the Manual for Accident Prevention in Construction of

the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., and the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, United States Department of Labor.

C. The Contractor shall procure and pay for all permits and licenses required for the

complete work specified herein and shown on the Drawings. D. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct cemetery driveway without written permission

from authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to interfere as little as possible with the use ordinarily made of roads, driveways, or other facilities near enough to the work to be affected thereby.




A. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements.

B. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor

shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing on-site and off-site conditions damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations.

1.11 DEFINITIONS

A. Free water includes:

1. Water that falls onto the project site as precipitation, whether as rain, snow, sleet

or other frozen rain variants. 2. Water that flows onto the site from adjacent properties as surface runoff or

stream flow, whether perennial or intermittent. 3. Ground and surface water that pond naturally as lakes, ponds, and wetlands of all

types. 4. Water below the surface of the project site in the form of groundwater.

B. Sediment Trapping Devices

1. Dewatering Tank: Dewatering tank are designed and fabricated to remove debris and sediment. Flow enters the tank through the top, passes through a fabric filter, and is discharged through the bottom of the tank. The filter separates the solids from the liquids. Dewatering tanks remove trash, gravel, sand, and silt, some visible oil and grease, and some metals (removed with sediment). To achieve high levels of flow, multiple tanks can be used in parallel. If additional treatment is desired, the tanks can be placed in series or as pre-treatment for other methods.

2. Gravity Bag Filter: A gravity bag filter, also referred to as a dewatering bag, is a square or rectangular bag made of non-woven geotextile fabric that collects sand, silt, and fines. Gravity bag filters are effective the removal of sediments (gravel, sand, and silt). Some metals are removed with the sediment. Water is pumped into one side of the bag and seeps through the bottom and sides of the bag.

3. Pressurized Bag Filter: A pressurized bag filter is a unit composed of single filter bags made from polyester felt material. The water filters through the unit and is discharged through a header, allowing for the discharge of flow in series to an additional treatment unit. Vendors provide pressurized bag filters in a variety of configurations. Some units include a combination of bag filters and cartridge filters for enhanced contaminant removal. Effective for the removal of sediment (sand and silt) and some metals, as well as the reduction of BOD, turbidity, and hydrocarbons. Oil absorbent bags are available for hydrocarbon removal. Filters can be used to provide secondary treatment to water treated via settling or basic filtration.

4. Sand Media Particulate Filter: Water is treated by passing it through canisters filled with sand media. Generally, sand filters provide a final level of treatment.



They are often used as a secondary or higher level of treatment after a significant amount of sediment and other pollutants have been removed. Effective for the removal of trash, gravel, sand, and silt and some metals, as well as the reduction of biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and turbidity. Sand filters can be used for standalone treatment or in conjunction with bag and cartridge filtration if further treatment is required. Sand filters can also be used to provide additional treatment to water treated via settling or basic filtration.

5. Sediment Basins: A sediment basin is a temporary basin with a controlled release structure that is formed by excavation and/or construction of an embankment to detain sediment-laden runoff and allow sediment to settle out before discharging. Sediment basins are effective for the removal of trash, gravel, sand, and silt and some metals that settle out with the sediment.

6. Sediment Trap: A temporary basin formed by excavation and/or construction of an earthen embankment across a waterway or low drainage area to detain sediment-laden runoff and allow sediment to settle out before discharging. Sediment traps are effective for the removal of large and medium sized particles (sand and gravel) that settle out as sediment.

7. Sumps provide localized, very shallow dewatering (less than 3 feet) and consist of pumping from perforated drums or casings in a gravel-filled backhoe pit. Sumps work best in tight, fine grained soils, or very coarse, bouldery deposits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOCCULANTS

A. Flocculent for use with stormwater shall be anionic Polyacrylamide (PAM), Chitosan (a derivative of exoskeletons of crustaceans) or approved other flocculants that are non-toxic and safe for human and aquatic life. Use anionic PAM at manufacturer’s recommended rates.

B. Selection appropriate flocculent on the soil particle type and concentration. Submit

sample of contaminated water to manufacturer’s testing laboratory for testing and analysis to select proper product and application rates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION

A. The work of this Section 31 2319 DEWATERING controls and manages surface and subsurface water (free water) conveyed and controlled under the work of Section 01 5713. Closely coordinate the work of this Section 31 2319 DEWATERING with the work of Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL.

3.02 GENERAL

A. An essential aspect of this Contract is the control and management of all free water on the site, including managing the discharge of sediment and suspended solids when non-



stormwater and accumulated stormwater must be removed from the project area so that construction work may be accomplished.

B. Water control shall include the control of groundwater from below the surface, and the

removal or control of ponded or flowing water by means of dikes, swales, ditches, surface drains, ponds, detention basins, sumps and all other Best Management Practices.

C. Monitor nearby surface water bodies for turbidity and siltation. Report appearance of

suspended solids and take all measures necessary to clean up suspended solids and prevent reoccurrences thereof.

D. Contractor shall dewater in conjunction to control all free water on or below the Project

site. Dewatering and unwatering shall proceed unaffected by recharge or flooding from nearby surface water in wetlands or streams. Remove or control free water by dewatering and unwatering to avoid:

1. Unstable natural or excavated slopes 2. Unstable, unworkable, or unsuitable subgrade 3. Boils, springs, blowouts, or seeps on slopes or in the subgrade 4. Flooding of excavations or structures 5. Uplift of constructed features such as concrete slabs 6. Dilution, corrosion, or other adverse effects on concrete, metals, or other

construction materials 7. Instability of nearby structures 8. Draining surrounding surface water and groundwater 9. Loss of fines from the foundation base and subbase 10. Safety problems 11. Delays in construction 12. Increased construction costs

E. Water controls required under the work of this Section 31 2319 address control of

sediment and suspended solids only. The water to be removed by dewatering is not believed by the Owner to be polluted. If it is later determined by observation or testing that the free water on site is polluted, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Owner’s Representative immediately.

F. Secure all required local and State approvals and permits for discharging accumulated

stormwater to a water body or storm drain. Sediment control and other appropriate G. BMPs such as outlet protection and energy dissipation shall be employed when this

water is discharged. H. Dewatering discharges shall not cause erosion at the discharge point.

3.03 DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall control the grading in areas under construction on the site so that

the surface of the ground will properly slope to prevent accumulation of water in excavated areas and adjacent properties. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrade, and from



flooding Project site and surrounding area. In conjunction with the requirements of Sections 01 5713, and various other Division 31 Sections, the Contractor shall grade and ditch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 1.0 percent slope) shall be maintained at all times.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for design of all systems to remove water from

below the ground surface in advance of excavation and maintaining the water level at a suitable depth below the working soil surface so that construction and proceed entirely “in the dry”, unhampered by the effects of water.

C. Protect subgrade and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water

accumulation. D. Should surface, rain or groundwater be encountered during the operations, the Contractor

shall furnish and operate pumps or other equipment, and provide all necessary piping to keep all excavation clear of water at all times and shall be responsible for any damage to work or adjacent properties from such water. All piping exposed above surface for this use shall be properly covered to allow foot traffic and vehicles to pass without obstruction.

E. Water from trenches and excavations shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not

cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to existing work, nor to the work completed or in progress, nor to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation.

F. Provide and install all temporary erosion and sediment control as specified in Section 01

5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL. G. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all

times to remove water. H. Presence of ground water in soil will not constitute a condition for which an increase in

the Contract price may be made. I. Do not place soil fills, pour concrete, lay piping or install appurtenance under any

circumstances in excavations containing free water. J. Where, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, pumping of excavations is not

effective in maintaining a dry firm subgrade, provide other dewatering methods acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

K. In excavations in rock, cemented granular materials, clays, and other stable materials,

Contractor shall select systems and methods to dewater concurrently with or following completion of excavation and filling operations, including drilling and maintaining dewatering wells and wellpoint system, draining to sumps and using surface pumps, installing subsurface cutoff devices such as sheet piling, slurry walls or rock grouting. Recognize that cutoffs are seldom 100 percent effective and supplementary dewatering and unwatering may be required. Soils that are clayey or silty, showing low permeability



and difficulty in draining may be dewatered by freezing for short periods. All dewatering efforts shall be designed and installed by the Contractor. All dewatering work, systems and methods shall be installed at no additional costs to the Owner.

3.04 WATER TREATMENT

A. Remove suspended solids and sediment from collected free water before discharge of

water off site. B. Contractor may select to use any of a variety of devices and methods to treat water

during dewatering operations from the construction site. Contractor shall select the dewatering devices and sediment treatment option(s) most suited to the site. 1. Sediment Basins:

a. Excavate and construct ditches, swales and channels to divert stormwater and groundwater to sediment basins. Fence the sediment basin(s) as necessary to protect the public. Install outlet protections as necessary to prevent erosion at the point of discharge.

b. Maintain safety fencing, vegetation, embankment, inlet and outfall structures, and all other features installed as part of the dewatering operations.

c. Remove sediment when the storage volume is reduced by one-third. 2. Sediment Traps:

a. Excavate and construct ditches, swales and channels to divert stormwater and groundwater to sediment traps. Trap inlets shall be located to maximize the travel distance to the trap outlet. Use rock or vegetation to protect the trap outlets against erosion. Provide maintenance of vegetation, embankment, inlet and outfall structures and all other associated features.

b. Remove sediment when the storage volume is reduced by one-third. 3. Weir Tanks and Dewatering Tanks:

a. Tanks shall be delivered to the site by the vendor, who shall provide assistance with set-up and operation. Size of tank shall be determined on flow volume, sediment and suspended solids and length of time on the Project site. Consult vendor to determine appropriate size of the tank.

b. Maintenance shall include periodic cleaning based on visual inspection or reduced flow.

c. Oil and grease disposal must be by licensed waste disposal company. 4. Gravity Bag Filter

a. In conjunction with the gravity bag filter, install a secondary barrier, such as a rock filter bed or straw/hay bale barrier, beneath and beyond the edges of the bag to capture sediments that escape the bag.

b. Inspect the flow conditions, bag condition, bag capacity, and the secondary barrier frequently. Replace the bag when it no longer filters sediment or passes water at a reasonable rate. The bag shall be disposed off-site.

5. Sand Media Particulate Filters: a. The filters shall be delivered to the Project site by the vendor who shall

provide initial set up services, and assistance with operation and



breakdown. Filters shall be serviced on a monthly basis to monitor and maintain the sand medium.

6. Pressurized Bag Filter: a. The filters shall be delivered to the Project site by the vendor who shall

provide initial set up services, and assistance with operation and breakdown. Filters shall be serviced on a monthly basis. The filter bags shall be replaced when the pressure differential exceeds the manufacturer’s recommendation.

7. Flocculants: a. Application of flocculants to stormwater runoff shall be by solid or

palletized dispersal placed in a wire basket or mesh screen within the runoff as it flows to the sediment trapping device. Allow flowing water to dissolve the material and release flocculent into the sediment trapping device. Do not allow flocculent material to be added directly to the sediment basin or any standing water. The flocculent product shall be introduced well in advance of the sediment control structure to allow for adequate mixing before the runoff arrives in the structure.

b. Consult manufacturer to determine specific dosing of the appropriate flocculent to achieve proper sedimentation.

c. Devise systems that thoroughly mix flocculants must with the stormwater. Allow flocculated particles to settle. Anticipate time duration required for settlement.

d. In so far as some flocculants are considered chemical pollutants, carefully monitor all dewatering discharge to ensure that flocculent has been adequately removed by settling.

e. Remove flocculated material from sediment trapping devices upon completion of the project and dispose of off site in a legal manner.

3.05 EVALUATION OF WATER CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Evaluate the performance of water control devices and facilities periodically during construction. Ensure the performance requirements of the Specifications are being met and that unusual or unexpected conditions are properly being accommodated.

B. Frequently inspect all installed BMPs as necessary to comply with permit requirements. C. Repair or replace dewatering system to ensure all components function as designed. D. Monitor as required in this Section.

3.06 CLEANUP

A. Disposal of Sediments:

1. Sediment that is removed from dewatering devices during routine maintenance

activities may be incorporated into the project as fills in locations designated by the Owner’s Representative or disposed of outside of the Project area in a legal manner.

2. Sediment that has been commingled with pollutants shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations.



B. Following general stabilization of the site by vegetation and built features, remove all

dewatering and unwatering devices, methods and systems. All debris, rubbish, garbage, trash, and discarded material, from the site. Dispose all in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The premises shall be left clean, presentable, and satisfactory.



A. Item No. 32 2319.01 DEWATERING will be measured as a LUMP SUM, installed complete and in place including all labor, materials and equipment required for or incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work of this Section as described in the Summary of Work above.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by a single payment item. Such

price shall constitute full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the Work as described in this Section.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

31 2319.01 DEWATERING LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


31 2333 - 1 TRENCHING & BACKFILLING

SECTION 31 2333

TRENCHING & BACKFILLING

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of




1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods

necessary to complete the earthwork which includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Trench excavation and backfilling.



Specifications: 1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS 2. Section 31 0510 SOILS & AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK 3. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 4. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION & FILLING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (AGC): Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction 2. United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety & Health

Administration: AGC Manual, Department of Labor & Industries 3. Massachusetts General Law. 4. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges


A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification.


A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING of this Specification.







Specification. B. Conform to all applicable requirements of Massachusetts General Law, Chapter 82A – D,

and 520 CMR 14.00.

1.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification. 1.10 DEFINITIONS

A. Trench - An excavation which is narrow in relation to its length, made below the surface

ground in excess of 3 feet below grade and the depth of which is, in general, greater than the width, but the width of the trench, as measured at the bottom, is no greater than 15 feet.

B. Unattended Trench - A trench where neither the excavator nor any of the people who are

engaged in construction activities at the trench, are present. C. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within building lines. D. And in accordance with the requirements of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification. 1.11 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Soils and aggregates in accordance with the requirements of Section 310510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK.

2.02 ACCESSORIES



A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep.

1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows:

a. Red: Electric. b. Yellow: not applicable. c. Orange: Telephone and other communications. d. Blue: not applicable. e. Green: Storm only.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION


Specification. 3.02 EXCAVATION - GENERAL

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 312300 EXCAVATION & FILLING of

this Specification and as described herein.

B. The work of trench excavation shall be conducted at such locations, at such rates of progress and in such a manner as will ensure the continued progress of the work, with a minimum inconvenience to the general public.

3.03 STOCKPILING


Specification.

3.04 CONTAMINATED MATERIAL A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification.

3.05 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING of this

Specification and the following.



B. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.06 SHORING AND SHEETING

A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to assure complete safety against collapse of earth at side of excavations.

B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations, and with more stringent requirements of

AGC Manual, Federal Department of Labor & Industries, Industrial Bulletin #12, Section 10.

C. If, at any place, sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, additional support

shall be placed at the expense of the Contractor. Direction by the Owner’s Representative to provide additional shoring, sheeting and/or bracing shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the adequacy and safety of construction.

D. Sheeting shall be driven ahead of the excavation to avoid loss of material from behind the

sheeting, except as may otherwise be permitted by the Owner’s Representative. Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting but if voids occur, they shall be filled immediately with sand and compacted.

E. The Contractor shall leave in place all sheeting unless otherwise directed in writing by

the Owner’s Representative. The Owner’s Representative may direct that the Contractor cut sheeting off 3 feet below finished grade, and the lower portion left in place. All voids left or caused by the withdrawal of sheeting shall be backfilled immediately using suitable materials and compacted.

F. All sheeting and bracing not ordered left in place shall be carefully removed in such a

manner as not to endanger the construction of other structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. All voids left after withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand and rammed with tools especially adapted to that purpose, or otherwise compacted as directed to achieve the required density.

G. Wood sheeting driven below mid-diameter of any pipe shall be left in place. Under no

circumstances shall any wood sheeting be cut off at a level lower than 1 foot above the top of pipe.

H. No excavation will be permitted below a line drawn upwards at 1.5 horizontal to 1.0

vertical slope from the bottom outside edge of the new foundations without providing adequate sheeting and shoring.

I. All earth support systems shall be designed and stamped by a Professional Engineer

registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and employed by the Contractor. Said design shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review not less than ten days prior to commencement of field installation activities. The earth support design shall be complete and include drawings indicating the extent of earth support in plan and section, design calculations, material specifications and complete construction sequence. The Contractor’s design shall take into account all soil pressures, hydrostatic pressures,



adjacent structure surcharge loads, applicable traffic, construction equipment, stockpiles and any other surcharge loads. All intermediate stages of loading as well as final conditions shall be considered.

J. The Contractor shall submit details showing his proposed method of sheeting and shoring

construction and other pertinent features. Such drawings and features shall be reviewed by the Town’s Representative before construction is started, but this does not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility for constructing and maintaining this construction.



Specification. 3.08 FROST PROTECTION


3.09 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Trench Excavation: If the Contractor encounters unsuitable soils materials at the specified depths during trench excavation, he shall contact the Owner’s Representative and request instructions before proceeding further. 1. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations.

a. Excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line and to meet the inverts noted on the Contract Documents.

2. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. a. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

3. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. a. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter hand-

excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

b. Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 12 inches below bottom of pipe to receive bedding course.

B. Placement in Trenches: Bedding materials as specified shall be placed to the full width of

the trench as indicated on the Contract Documents. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. After a pipe is bedded, the trench shall be filled to the centerline of the pipe with additional bedding material as specified except at the joint. After the joint is



inspected, that portion shall be filled in. Material under and around the pipe shall be carefully and thoroughly compacted to the densities specified under the work of Section 312213 ROUGH GRADING and Section 312300 EXCAVATION & FILLING.

C. From the centerline of the pipe to a point 12 inches above the top of the pipe place

additional bedding material as backfill by hand and compact with mechanical tampers to not less than 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content of the material. Above this point, backfill shall be placed by machine or by hand in layers 6 inches deep and compacted to the densities specified. This backfill shall be extended as shown in the Contract Documents. Backfill simultaneously on all sides of pipe or structure. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.

D. Place concrete backfill in all utility trenches that pass under concrete footing or within 18

inches of footings. Place concrete at level of bottom of footings.

E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is

removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6

inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.10 DUST CONTROL


3.11 CLEANUP

A. At the end of all excavation, filling and grading operations and before acceptance of the

work, the Contractor shall remove all debris, rubbish, garbage, trash, and discarded material, from the site. He shall dispose of them in a manner satisfactory to the Town’s Representative. The premises shall be left clean, presentable, and satisfactory.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Removal and disposal off site of unsatisfactory or unsuitable materials, including bed

rock and boulders encountered during the work of this Section shall be measured in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING.



B. Trench excavation as specified in this Section will be measured in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING of this Specification. No separate measurement for trench excavation will be made under the Work of this Contract.

C. Backfilling of trenches including bedding as specified in this Section will be measured in

accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING of this Specification. No separate measurement for filling will be made under the Work of this Contract.


A. Payment for removal and disposal off site of unsatisfactory or unsuitable materials, including bed rock and boulders encountered during the work of this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING.

B. The Work measured above will be paid by payment items specified in Section 31 2300

EXCAVATION AND FILLING. 4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


31 5000 - 1 EXCAVATION SUPPORT & PROTECTION

SECTION 31 500

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION






1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Design, furnish and install temporary excavation support systems as required to maintain lateral support, prevent loss of ground, limit soil movements to acceptable limits and protect from damage existing and proposed improvements including, but not limited to, pipelines, utilities, structures, roadways, and other facilities.

2. Trench box temporary excavation support system is only acceptable for pipe or utility trench excavations. Temporary unsupported open cut excavation with stable sloping sides is allowed where applicable.

3. Construction of the temporary excavation support systems shall not disturb the existing structures or the completed proposed structures. Damage to such structures shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. The Contractor shall bear the entire cost and responsibility of correcting any failure, damages, subsidence, upheaval or cave-ins as a result of improper installation, maintenance or design of the temporary excavation support systems. The Contractor shall pay for all claims, costs and damages that arise as a result of the work performed at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Conform to the requirements of the OSHA Standards and Interpretations: "Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavation, Trenching, and Shoring", and all other applicable laws, regulations, rules, and codes.

B. Temporary Excavation Support System Installer's Qualifications:

1. Not less than three (3) years of experience in the installation of similar types and

equal complexity as the proposed system. 2. Completed not less than three (3) successful excavation support systems of

similar type and equal complexity as the proposed system.


31 5000 - 2 EXCAVATION SUPPORT & PROTECTION

C. Install all temporary excavation support systems under the supervision of a supervisor having the following qualifications:

1. Not less than five (5) years experience in installation of systems of similar type

and equal complexity as the proposed system. 2. Completed at least five (5) successful temporary excavation support systems of

similar type and equal complexity as the proposed system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide specific trench box sizes for each pipe and utility excavation with structural capacity of retaining soil types as described in OSHA's 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Bottom of the trench box excavation support system shall be above the pipe invert prior to installing the pipe.

B. Notify utility owners if existing utilities interfere with the temporary excavation support

system. Modify the existing utility with the utility owner’s permission or have the utility owner make the modifications at no additional cost to Owner.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Designing, furnishing and installing temporary excavation support systems will be considered incidental to the work of this Contract. No separate measurement will be made for said work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING.


A. No separate measurement will be made for said work but it shall be considered incidental to each payment item described in Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION


32 1216 - 1 ASPHALT PAVING

SECTION 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING





requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Bituminous Concrete Paving B. Bituminous Concrete Curb

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 0510 - SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK B. Section 31 2213 - ROUGH GRADING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. B. ADA: Americans with Disability Act C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. D. MHD: "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges", Massachusetts Highway

Department, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, latest edition. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Paving on public property shall comply with all laws, rules and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over such work.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to render the site erosion free. Approval by

Landscape Architect of any method to accomplish this does not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for controlling erosion and/or sedimentation throughout the construction process.

C. Construction Tolerances:

1. Variations from slope as indicated for finished surface of paving: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

D. HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY: When installed, all paving shall be handicap accessible

and will comply with the Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1987 and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, latest version.



1.06 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICE

A. The testing laboratory will be responsible for conducting and interpreting tests. Each report shall state whether or not the test specimens conform to all requirements of the Contract Documents and will specifically note any deviation there from if any. Specific test and inspection requirements shall be as specified herein.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix designs of bituminous concrete paving and report on tests of in place construction of bituminous pavement.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install bituminous concrete paving in accordance with temperature. Store all materials protected from the weather and at temperature not less than 40° F.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING

A. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT: shall be Class 1 conforming to the requirements of Section 460.20 to and including 460.40 and M3.11.00 for dense binder course of MHD except as herein modified.

2.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURBING

A. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB, TYPE 2: shall be Class I conforming to the applicable requirements for Dense Mix, M3.11.03, Table A of MHD.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACEMENT OF AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENTS

A. Construct base course as detailed on the Drawings for all areas of new paved surfaces in this Section. Make any corrections necessary to base materials furnished under Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK, and installed under Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING, to the sections and elevations shown on the Drawings.

B. Spread aggregate from self-spreading vehicles, approved type of power grader or by hand

upon prepared subgrade. Spread evenly in layers so as to avoid separation of aggregates. Layers shall not exceed 6 inches in depth after compaction. Remove stones larger than 3 inches. When spread, rolled and compacted on the prepared surface, it shall form a stable surface. All rolling shall be done with a roller weighing 8 to 10 tons. Compact any portion which is not accessible to a roller by mechanical or hand tamper. Compact to 95% Proctor Density.



C. Final rolled surface shall be true to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Fill in any depression that may appear during and after rolling with aggregate and reroll until the surface is true and even.

D. Tolerance: 1/4 inch maximum above or below the cross-section grades and 1/4 inch

maximum under a 10 foot line longitudinally. E. Maintain the surface of any layer in its finished condition until succeeding layer is placed.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING

A. Construct bituminous concrete paving in accordance with the MHD Standard Specification Section 420 and applicable paragraphs of Sections 460.20 to and including 460.68. 1. The finished surface of the top course shall be spread parallel to the existing, adjacent pavement surfaces and shall conform to the grades shown on the Drawings and to the tolerances specified in Section 460.67 of MHD. Finished surface shall be free of valleys and dips.

B. No bituminous material shall be applied when the temperature is below 32° F. C. No vehicular traffic of any kind shall be allowed to pass over the newly finished

surface until it has had time to set. Twenty-four hours will be considered sufficient time for the pavement to set in most cases, but this period may be extended by the Landscape Architect as required by weather or other reasons.

D. All areas of finished paving on which water stands or which are found excessively

uneven shall be promptly brought to the correct grade and line. When tested with a ten foot straight edge there shall be no deviation from true surface planes represented by the grade elevations shown on the Drawings in excess of 1/4 inch.

E. Do any repair or patching to pavements outside the project site damaged by the work of

the Contract. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURBING

A. Construct bituminous concrete curbing in accordance with the MHD Standard Specification Section 501.64. 1. Type 2 Curb shall be formed as shown in the Drawings and shall match the

existing curb on site.

B. No bituminous material shall be applied when the temperature is below 32° F. C. New bituminous curbing shall be protected from vehicular traffic of any kind until

the curbing has had time to set. Twenty-four hours will be considered sufficient time for the curbing to set in most cases, but this period may be extended by the Landscape Architect as required by weather or other reasons.

D. Do any repair to curbing outside the project site limits of work damaged by the work of the Contract.



3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The testing laboratory shall make the following inspections and tests: Test aggregate materials for compliance with MHD or furnish accepted certificate of compliance from source of supply. 1. Test bituminous concrete in accordance with MHD, including:

a. Penetration Tests. b. Marshall Stability Tests. c. Voids Test. d. Percent of Bitumen Test. e. Aggregate Gradations. f. Certifications required by MHD.

2. Verify thickness of the finished bituminous pavement construction obtained

from specimens cut by the testing laboratory with a core drill. The diameter of the specimens shall in no case be less than 3-7/8 inches or more than 4 inches.

B. Testing laboratory will perform the following general services:

1. Determine maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of soils in accordance with standards herein before specified.

2. Provide optimum moisture - maximum density curves. 3. Test and approve all compacted aggregate layers before construction thereon.

C. Testing laboratory will perform the following field tests:

1. Determine frequency of field tests to assure densities required. Unless otherwise determined, minimum field testing shall include one (1) density test for each 1,000 square feet.

D. If any of the above tests indicate that the Specifications have not been met, the

Contractor shall pay for such additional tests as may be required to assure that compliance has been attained.


A. Item No. 32 1216.01 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING will be measured per SQUARE FOOT, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

B. Item No. 32 1216.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB will be measured per LINEAR

FOOT, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.





4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

32 1216.01 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING SQUARE FOOT 32 1216.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB LINEAR FOOT

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


32 1313 - 1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT

SECTION 32 1313 REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental

work, and construction methods necessary to furnish and install reinforced concrete slabs, as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein.



Specifications:

1. Division 31 Sections relating to EARTHWORK as applicable 2. Section 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING 3. Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS

1.04 REFERENCES


1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 306R Cold Weather Concreting 316R Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and

Concrete Bases. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A 185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric. Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

A 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

C 33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates C 94 Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete C 143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete C 150 Specification for Portland Cement C 171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete C 231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method



C 309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C 1116 Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Concrete &

Shotcrete D 226 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing D 545 Test Methods for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for

Concrete Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Types) D 1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Modified Effort [56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)] D 1752 Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion

Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 3. Massachusetts MHD

Specifications Standard - Specifications for Highways and Bridges

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Description of Methods and Sequence of Placement. For each type of specially-finished

concrete provide description of methods and sequence of placement. B. Certifications: Submit written certification that the concrete meets the requirements of

this specification.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the reinforced

Portland cement concrete paving shall conform to ACI 316R, and applicable portions of the following: 1. MHD Specifications Section 476 Cement Concrete Pavement.

B. Paving work shall be done only after excavation and construction work has been

completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance of subbase.

C. Pavement, base, or subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Base course shall be specified, provided, installed and paid for under the work of

applicable Division 31 EARTHWORK sections of this Specification.

2.02 CONCRETE FORMWORK A. The dimensions of the lumber used to form concrete pavements shall not be less than 2

inches nominal thickness by the required pavement depth shown on the Detailed Drawings.



2.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Welded Wire Mesh (WWM) reinforcement shall conform to the applicable requirements

of ASTM A185. Fabric reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric reinforcement in rolls will not be permitted. Sizes will be as shown on the Detailed Drawings.

B. Joint Dowel Bars: AISI Type 304 stainless steel plain round bars. Saw cut bars as

required, free from burrs or out of round ends. Coat bars in accordance with AASHTO M254.

C. Dowel Caps: plastic having a closed end with a stop to hold the end of the sleeve at a

minimum distance of 1 inch from the end of the dowel bar.

2.04 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE A. Cast-in-place concrete shall be air-entrained concrete with minimum 28-day compressive

strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch, conforming to the requirements and applicable provisions of MHD Specifications Section M4.02. 1. Air Entrainment: Concrete shall be air-entrained 7 percent minimum +/-1

percent, by volume. 2. Slump: Concrete shall have a slump of 2 inches to 4 inches slump. 3. Maximum Aggregate Size: Aggregate size shall be a maximum of 3/4 inches. 4. Thickness of Concrete: Depths shall be as noted on the Contract Documents.

2.05 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing shall be by moist curing or by use of curing compound. B. Curing paper shall be nonstaining, fiber reinforced laminated Kraft bituminous product

conforming to ASTM C 171. Four mil polyethylene sheeting may be substituted for curing paper.

C. Curing compound shall be a resin-base, white pigmented compound conforming to

ASTM C 309, Type 2.

2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide expansion joints as indicated in the Construction Documents. B. Expansion Joint Filler:

1. Closed cell polymer foam meeting requirements of ASTM D 1752, Sections 3.1 to 3.4, based on compression requirement of 10 pounds per square inch minimum and 25 pounds per square inch maximum. Recovery rate following 50 percent compression shall exceed 99 percent recovery, per ASTM D 545. Foam shall be equal to Ceramar Foam Filler, manufactured by W.R. Meadows. Inc. or an approved equal.

C. Backer Rod: Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS.



2.07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Transverse construction joints shall be placed whenever placing of concrete is suspended

for more than 30 minutes. 1. Butt joint with dowels or thickened edge joint shall be used if construction joints

occur at location of control joint. Submit sketch to Owner’s Representative for review and acceptance of proposed system.

2. Keyed joints with tiebars shall be used if the joint occurs at any other location. 2.08 SEALANT

A. Joint sealant, backer rod and primer shall be in accordance with Section 07 9200 JOINT

SEALERS of this Specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE

A. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of areas to receive paving, as required to form

a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be as specified, performed and paid under applicable Division 31 EARTHWORK sections.

B. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction.

Ruts greater than or equal to 2 inches deep in subgrade shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement.

C. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.

3.02 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Aggregate base course for concrete paving shall be provided, installed and paid for under

the Section 31 0510, SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK, of this Specification.

3.03 FORMWORK

A. All forms shall be joined neatly and tightly, shall be set true to line and grade, well staked and braced, and shall have uniform bearing throughout their length. Remove all forms and miscellaneous appurtenances from pavement edges and dispose of all formwork and appurtenances at the end of the construction project. 1. Forms shall not be moved for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed, or for

a longer period if directed by the Owner’s Representative. 2. Remove all forms. Extreme care shall be taken in removing forms in order that

no damage will be done to the concrete. 3. Under no condition shall any bar, pick or other tool be used which depends upon

leverage on the concrete for removal of the forms.



3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Before being placed in position, reinforcing for reinforced concrete shall be thoroughly

cleaned of loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material which may reduce the bond between the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be re-inspected and cleaned when necessary.

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Mesh reinforcement shall be held firmly in place against vertical or

transverse movement by means of satisfactory devices. Where mesh reinforcement is spliced, it shall be lapped at least 12 inches. 1. Unless designated otherwise on the Contract Documents, wire mesh shall be

placed midway within the depth, and parallel to the finished surface of concrete pavements.

2. Do not pour concrete over top of reinforcement unless it is supported underneath.

3. Contractor shall pull reinforcement up immediately after pouring concrete to make sure that the reinforcement is in the middle of the slab and not sitting on the bottom.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents, reinforcing shall extend within 2

inches of formwork and expansion joints. 1. Reinforcing shall continue through control joints.

3.05 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Expansion joints shall be 1/2 inches wide and shall be as located on the Contract

Documents. Expansion joints shall be formed in the concrete to required width with preformed joint filler in place. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab. Joint filler shall extend the full length of the expansion joint. 1. Contractor shall request the presence of the Owner’s Representative to review

the layout of expansion joints prior to pouring the concrete. 2. Follow the manufacturer's application recommendations for joint filler and

sealer. 3. Joint alignment shall be straight and true.

3.06 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

A. Paving mix, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed

as to weather, condition of base and the like, shall meet the requirements of ACI 316R. Pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The Owner’s Representative shall be notified of concrete placement sufficiently in

advance of start of operation to allow his representative to complete preliminary inspection of the work, including subgrade, forms, and reinforcing steel, if used. 1. No concrete shall be deposited until the Owner’s Representative has inspected

the placing of reinforcement and given permission to place concrete. C. Normal concrete placement procedures shall be followed. Concrete shall arrive at the job

site so that no additional water will be required to produce the desired slump. When



conditions develop that required addition of water to produce the desired slump, permission of the Owner’s Representative must be obtained. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its place of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation or loss of material. 1. Concrete pavement shall be placed in a series of alternate pours such that every

other panel bounded by expansion joints shall be poured first. 2. The intervening panels shall then be poured as a secondary operation only after

the first panels have hardened sufficiently to allow the removal of all temporary transverse forming supports.

3. Concrete shall be placed in one course, to full depth, as detailed on the Contract Documents.

D. Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than 40

degrees Fahrenheit. In the event that unforeseen rain occurs, cover all concrete surfaces with plastic sheet covering to prevent alteration of texture.

E. Adjacent work shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation.

Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions.

F. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete

is to be placed shall thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There shall be no free water on surface.

G. Concrete which has set or partially set before placing shall not be employed.

Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. H. Concrete shall be thoroughly spaded and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous

mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners of forms. I. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be

cleaned of foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and washing. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8 inches thick, shall be well scrubbed into thoroughly dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried or set.

3.07 FINISHING

A. Finished concrete surface for subbases for unit pavement systems shall be wood floated

to a slightly rough surface. Surface shall be dense and at the exact level and slope required. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/4 inches in 10 feet

B. Where finishing is performed before end of curing period, concrete shall not be

permitted to dry out, and shall be kept continuously moist from time of placing until end of curing period, or until curing membrane is applied.



3.08 CURING A. It is essential that concrete be kept continuously damp from time of placement until end

of specified curing period. It is equally essential that water not be added to surface during floating and troweling operations, and not earlier than 24 hours after concrete placement. Between finishing operations surface shall be protected from rapid drying by a covering of waterproofing paper. Surface shall be damp when the covering is placed over it, and shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water, applied as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not sooner than 24 hours after placing concrete. None of the water so applied shall be troweled or floated into surface.

B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with curing paper or application

of a curing compound.

1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper with seams lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed to become moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During curing period surface shall be checked frequently, and sprayed with water as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing concrete.

2. If concrete is cured with a curing compound, compound shall be applied at a rate of 200 square feet per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each other.

3. Curing period shall be seven days minimum.

3.09 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed, placed, or cured when the

mean daily temperature is below 40 degree Fahrenheit or is expected to fall to below 40 degree Fahrenheit within 72 hours. After placement, the concrete shall be protected by covering, heat, or both.

B. Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing weather shall be subject to

the approval and direction of the Owner’s Representative. Procedures shall be in accordance with provisions of ACI 306R.

3.10 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms and

reinforcement just prior to placing shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every effort shall be made to minimize delays which will result in excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival on the job.

B. During periods of excessively hot weather (95 degree Fahrenheit., or above), ingredients

in the concrete shall be cooled insofar as possible and cold mixing water shall be used to maintain the temperature of the concrete at permissible levels all in accordance with the provisions of ACI 305. Any concrete with a temperature above 95 degree Fahrenheit, when ready for placement will not be acceptable, and will be rejected.

C. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather giving air

temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, and the like.) and



relative humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as delivered and after placing in forms. Data should be correlated with the progress of the work so that conditions surrounding the construction of any part of the structure can be ascertained.

3.11 SEALING OF JOINTS

A. In accordance with Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS.

3.12 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened

sufficiently.

3.13 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS A. The following acceptance standards shall be applied to this Contract. These standards are

considered superior to typical industry standards. Any portion of the concrete paving that does not come up to these required acceptance standards shall be removed at the direction of the Owner’s Representative. Saw cut pavement at nearest adjacent tooled joint, remove concrete pavement and discard off site in a legal manner and replace with new concrete pavement meeting the requirements of this Section. 1. Pavement surfaces shall be free of cracking. 2. Pavement surfaces shall not pond water. 3. Pavement surfaces shall be free of visible high and low spots. 4. Steel mesh reinforcing shall not penetrate the surfaces or sides of the concrete

slab. 5. All expansion joints shall be straight, true, uniform in width and free from twists,

bends, kinks and misalignments. 6. Expansion joints shall be placed as required by the Contract Documents. 7. Pours without expansion joints cast into them. 8. All forms shall be removed from the site.


A. Furnishing, installing and removing as applicable all forms, reinforcing mesh, control joints and expansion joints, and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 32 1313.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE SLABS will be measured per

SQUARE FOOT, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.





4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

32 1313.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE SLABS SQUARE FOOT END OF SECTION

Blank Page


32 1440 - 1 GRANITE UNIT PAVING

SECTION 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING






1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to furnish and install the granite pavers as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified, including but not limited to the following:

1. Granite Pavers.



Specifications:

1. Section 01 2300 ALTERNATES 2. Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE 3. Section 32 1313 REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT 4. Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS

1.04 REFERENCES


1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C 91 Specification for Masonry Cement C 270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry C 780 Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of

Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry C 1019 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for the

following items:

1. Mortar, grout materials, bond coats including additives.



B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings of granite pavers in accordance with the requirements of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE of this Specification.

C. Submit documentation demonstrating that granite setters have the required experience

noted in Paragraph 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE, in this Section. Submit a list of projects completed within the last 5 years that are comparable in size and complexity to the work of the Contract Documents.


A. Granite setters shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the setting of granite paver work of the type specified for this project.

1.07 SAMPLE PANEL

A. Construct a sample panel of granite paving on the specified base before start of any

granite paving work. Sample panel shall exhibit granite pavers, grain and grain direction, and required jointing. Unless otherwise indicated, size of panel shall be 6 feet x 6 feet minimum. The Owner’s Representative will inspect and accept sample panel. If the original sample is not acceptable, construct additional panels at no cost to the Owner’s Representative until an acceptable panel is constructed. The acceptable panel shall become the standard for the entire job, and shall remain undisturbed until completion of all granite paving. Remove panel from the site upon completion of paving.

1.08 LAYOUT

A. The granite paver layout indicated on the Contract Documents is approximate. The final

configuration of the paving will be determined in the field by the Owner’s Representative. Do no paving until said determination is made.

1.09 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Following delivery to the Project site, granite shall be stored on wood skids or pallets,

covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane and protected from the weather. Skids shall be placed and stacked in such a manner as to evenly distribute the weight of the granite materials and to prevent breakage, cracking, and damage to granite pieces. Granite materials shall be stored in such a manner as to allow air to circulate around the granite material. Granite shall not be permitted to be in direct contact with the ground any time during storage.

B. Granite shall be carefully handled to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling, or other

damage. Pinch or wrecking bars shall not be used without protecting edges of granite with wood or other rigid materials. Granite units shall be lifted with wide-belt type slings wherever possible; wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances that might cause staining or damage to granite finish shall not be used.

C. Granite damaged in any manner will be rejected and shall be replaced with new materials

at no additional cost to the Owner.



1.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES A. Finished surfaces adjacent to the paving work shall be adequately protected from soiling,

staining and other damage. 1.11 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Protection:

1. Remove any ice or snow formed on granite or concrete bed by carefully applying

heat until top surface is dry to touch. 2. Remove granite paver work that is determined by the Owner’s Representative to

be damaged by freezing conditions. 3. Perform the following construction procedures while granite paver work is

progressing:

Air Temperature Procedures

40o - 32oF. Heat sand to produce mortar temperatures between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

32o - 25oF. Heat sand to produce mortar temperatures between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.

25o - 20oF. Heat sand to produce mortar temperatures between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit.. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. Use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 15 miles per hour.

20oF. - below Heat sand to produce mortar temperatures between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees Fahrenheit. Do not lay units that have a surface temperature below 20 degrees Fahrenheit.

4. Latex admixture shall be kept at 50 degrees Fahrenheit minimum.

B. Cold Weather Protection for Completed Granite Paving Work:

Mean Daily Air Temperatures Procedures

40o - 32oF. Protect granite paving work from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.

32o - 25oF. Completely cover granite paving work with weather-resistive membrane for at least 24 hours.

25o - 20oF. Completely cover granite paving work with insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours.

20oF. - below Maintain granite paver work at temperature above 32 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat.



1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents, and do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Do not build on frozen work; remove and replace granite paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

3. During all seasons, protect partially completed granite paver work against weather when work is not in progress.

1.12 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Testing of granite shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE.

B. Test mortar for properties indicated below:

1. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C 270. 2. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780. 3. Grout compressive strength will be tested per ASTM C 1019.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRANITE

A. As specified under the work of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE, of this Specification.

2.02 MORTAR SETTING BED AND POINTING MORTAR

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 04 0503 MORTARS, of this

Specification.

2.03 BOND COAT A. High strength bond coat shall be a mixture of the following ingredients:

1. Laticrete 211 Crete Powder and Laticrete 4237 or approved alternative manufacturer.

2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Expansion joint filler shall be specified under Section 32 1313 REINFORCED

CONCRETE PAVEMENT of this Specification. B. Joint sealer at expansion joints shall be specified, provided, installed and paid for under

Division 7 Section, JOINT SEALERS of this Specification. 2.05 MASONRY CLEANER

A. Masonry cleaner shall be a product specifically designed to remove excess mortar and

grout, rust, job dirt, and all construction stains during a final cleaning of new granite



surfaces and leave those granite surfaces uniformly clean. Masonry cleaner shall be formulated to avoid damaging or staining of granite surfaces, damage to mortar joints, and alteration of the color of the mortar joints. Masonry cleaner shall be an environmentally safe product that can be flushed into a storm sewer system without damage to that system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ACCEPTABILITY OF CONCRETE BASE

A. Contractor shall examine the concrete base to determine its adequacy to receive granite, pavers, granite sets, and mortar setting bed. Evidence of inadequate base shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner’s Representative.

B. Start of work of this Section 32 1440 GRANITE UNIT PAVING shall constitute

acceptance of the concrete base.

3.02 SETTING A. No pavers shall be laid in inclement weather or when the temperature is 40 degrees

Fahrenheit, and dropping, nor shall any work be done on rising temperatures until the temperature reaches 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Frozen mortar materials shall not be used.

B. Granite pavers shall be set on a mortar setting bed over a prepared concrete base slab.

All setting shall be done by competent masons under adequate supervision. Do any cleaning necessary to cement concrete base to provide a clean base surface, free from dust, oil, grease, other impurities, or loose or friable particles.

C. Dampen the surface immediately before placing the mortar setting bed, but do not allow

free water to remain on the surface. D. Granite pavers with chips, cracks, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the

finished work shall not be used. E. Bond coat shall be applied to concrete base slab as a slurry by using flat side of a trowel.

Thickness of bond coat shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Press bond coat firmly into the base slab. Apply as much bond coat as can be covered with mortar setting bed in 15 to 20 minutes.

F. Mortar bed shall be spread evenly over the troweled bond coat. Mortar setting shall be

1/2-inch thick, minimum. Screed mortar setting bed to a smooth and consistant surface. Let mortar bed harden sufficiently to walk upon, typically 24 hours. A second application of the bond coat mixture shall be applied to mortar setting bed using flat trowel to thickness of 1/16 inch. Comb on additional bond coat with notched sides of trowel. Back butter bricks with bond coat to ensure a full bond between pavers and setting bed.

G. Before setting, the back of each piece of granite shall be dampened. Each piece shall be

carefully bedded into a wet, sticky bond coat mixture and tapped home to a full and solid



bearing. Particular care shall be exercised to equalize bed and joint openings and eliminate the need for redressing of exposed surfaces.

H. Granite pavers shall be set true to the required lines and grades in the pattern detailed on

the Contract Documents. Granite pavers shall be neatly cut and fitted at all perimeters and closures to fit neatly and closely, with joints uniform in thickness. Pavers shall be cut with a water-cooled, cut-off wheel masonry saw using a diamond carbide blade. In no case shall granite pavers less than 4 inch x 4 inch in face dimension be installed; suitable adjustments shall be made in layout, subject to review and approval of the Owner’s Representative, to ensure all installed pavers are at least 4 inch x 4 inch in face dimension.

I. Exposed surfaces of pavers shall be kept free from bed mortar at all times. Any bed

mortar smears shall be immediately removed with a clean sponge and clean water before latex modified mortar can set.

J. Pavers shall be set true to the required lines and grades in the pattern detailed on the

Contract Documents. After pavers have been placed, pass a suitable straight edge over the pavers with in a circular motion to confirm that there is a continuous and even alignment between payers. If pavers are not in the required alignment, remove and reset as required to bring them to the required lines and grades. Leveling of the pavers shall be done as the setting operation proceeds so that it is not necessary to disturb the payers set earlier.

3.03 JOINT TREATMENT FOR GRANITE PAVING

A. Unless otherwise indicated, expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch thick. All joints shall be

uniform. 1. Granite Paving: Unless otherwise indicated, joints between granite pavers shall

be 3/8 inch wide plus or minus 1/16 inch.

B. Initial grout placement shall occur after bond coat has substantially set, typically no sooner than 24 hours after placement of brick on bond coat. Joints shall be dry and free of standing water. Joints shall be free of dust and debris. If joints have collected dust or debris between placement of bricks and installation of grout, blow joints free with compressed air system approved by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Dry sweep joints full with dry mortar and follow by spraying with water to compact

mortar in joints. Final grouting of joints as specified shall be done in accordance with the following paragraph.

D. Pointing Mortar Mix: Mix mortar grout to the standard stiff, workable grout (a slurry of

medium consistency). With a rigid squeegee or trowel, spread joint filler back and forth across the paver faces until the joints are filled and firmly packed. Broadcast dry grout mix over filled joints and burlap or sponge in traditional manner. Once joint filler has taken a firm set, clean with burlap or sponge. Following burlap treatment, paver joints should be slightly concave. Minimum one week later, clean with approved acid-free masonry cleaner. Dilute and apply masonry cleaner per manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Expansion joints shall be cleaned of all mortar and left ready for sealing of joints.



F. Expansion joints in granite paving shall be aligned to match the expansion joint in the concrete base course. Install expansion joints in granite paving as specified under Section 32 1313 REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT in this Specification.

G. Upon completion of granite paver work, surfaces shall be left in a clean, unsoiled

condition, acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. H. Cure joints for at least 7 days after installing by covering with curing paper or other non-

staining material approved by the Owner’s Representative.

3.04 SEALANTS

A. Expansion joints and other joints to receive sealant shall be cleaned of all mortar and left ready for sealing of joints specified, provided and paid for under the work of Section 07 9200 JOINT SEALERS, in this Specification.

3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Remove and replace granite pavers that have been broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise

damaged. Remove and replace units which are misaligned or not to grade or do not match adjoining granite work. Provide new matching units, install as specified and fill joints to eliminate evidence of replacement. Repair defective and unsatisfactory joints as required to provide a neat, uniform appearance.

B. After completion of granite paving, surfaces shall be carefully cleaned, removing all dirt,

excess mortar, filler, and stains using the approved masonry cleaner. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for use. Apply masonry cleaner within the time frame noted in the manufacturer’s literature. 1. Test suitability of masonry cleaner on a test area for approval by the Owner’s

Representative. All test area to dry for the appropriate time period as described by Manufacturer’s product literature.

2. Protect all adjacent architecture, pavement, lawns and planting from damage by masonry cleaner. Employ waterproof tarps and other appropriate barriers to prevent damage to adjacent materials.

3. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with clean water per manufacturer’s written directions.

C. Expansion joints and other joints to receive sealant shall be cleaned of all mortar and left

ready for sealing of joints specified, provided and paid for under the work of this Section.


A. Adjusting and cleaning of granite unit paving, joint treatments and sealants and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.



B. Item No. 32 1440.01 INSTALLATION OF GRANITE UNIT PAVING will be measured per SQUARE FOOT, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by payment item. Such price shall


4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

32 1440.01 INSTALLATION OF GRANITE UNIT PAVING SQUARE FOOT

END OF SECTION


32 1645 - 1 GRANITE CURB

SECTION 32 1645 GRANITE CURB






1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to furnish and install granite curb, as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified.



Specifications: 1. Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD):

Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridges, latest edition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings of granite curbing for Town Representative's approval

1. Shop drawings shall indicate size, dimension, and finish of each curb type. 2. Submit a complete schedule for quantity, lengths, and size for all curbing on the

project. B. Submit concrete design mix for concrete cradle at curb.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GRANITE CURB A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE.

2.02 CEMENT MORTAR

A. Mortar for pointing joints between curbstones shall be a cement mortar composed of one

part Portland cement and two parts sand, by volume with sufficient water to form a workable, stiff mixture.

2.03 CONCRETE

A. Concrete for Foundation Cradle at Curb: Concrete where designated for foundation

cradle at curb installations shall be a zero slump concrete, described as follows: 1. MHD Specifications Section M4.00.0, 4,000 psi, 3/4 inches aggregate concrete

mix, without water, placed dry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SETTING CURB

A. Curb shall be set in accordance with MHD Specifications Section 501, except as

indicated below. 1. Following placement and compaction of gravel subbase, provide zero slump

concrete foundation, to depths indicated on the Contract Documents, completely supporting curbstones throughout their entire length.

2. Vertical face of vertical curb shall be plumb, with curb top parallel to adjacent surface.

3. Granite curbing shall be installed in accordance with MHD Specifications Section 500.

4. Curb shall be set accurately to line and grade. Curb alignment shall be uniform, with smooth and continuous arris lines. Radius curbs shall meet with a common tangent. Curb units shall be fitted together as closely as possible. Curb shall not be field cut.

5. After proper alignment of curbing and concrete foundation have been established, place additional concrete surround, of wetter consistency, to extend concrete up each face of curbing as detailed on the Contract Documents.

6. Joints, between curb units shall be carefully filled with a cement mortar, and neatly pointed on the top and front exposed portions. After pointing excess mortar shall be cleaned from curb surface.

7. Backfill material on each side of curb and curb cradle shall be as specified for adjacent surface and shall be thoroughly compacted by means of power tampers. Extreme care shall be taken not to destroy curb alignment. Curb sections disturbed during backfilling or otherwise shall be reset to line and grade, and properly backfilled.




A. Setting curb, adjusting and cleaning granite curb, joint treatments and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately in the Work of this Section, but will be considered incidental to the work of each payment item in Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY and Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE of this Specification.



Contract. Payment for said Work will be considered incidental to payment for each payment item in Section 04 4300 UNIT MASONRY and Section 04 4000 PROJECT STONE of this Specification.

4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

NONE

END OF SECTION


32 9119 - 1 LANDSCAPE GRADING

SECTION 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING






1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to place planting soils as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified in this Section. Placement of planting soils shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Placing, spreading and fine grading of planting soil. 2. Topsoil analysis and Amendments.



Specifications: 1. Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION & SEDIMENT CONTROL 2. Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 3. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 4. Section 32 9220 LAWNS

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. At less than 30 days following stripping and stockpiling operations, the Contractor shall

submit to the Owner’s Representative certified test results for existing stockpiled topsoil. B. Submit reports for existing stockpiled topsoil. Deliver samples to the testing laboratory

and pay costs. Send report directly to Owner’s Representative. 1. Testing:

a. Test for agricultural suitability analysis shall include: 1. soil pH by water pH and buffer (smp) pH tests 2. percentage organic content 3. nitrate nitrogen 4. ammonium nitrogen 5. phosphorus 6. potassium 7. calcium 8. aluminum 9. magnesium



10. manganese 11. Micronutrients 12. Toxins including but not limited to lead, cadmium, arsenic and

mercury 13. Saturated hydraulic conductivity per ASTM D5856 14. Calculated CEC

b. Soil analysis tests shall show recommendations for soil additives to correct soils deficiencies as necessary, and for additives necessary to accomplish the work as specified. 1. Test results: test data and recommendations for soil amendments

including but not limited to: nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and limestone.

C. Testing General 1. Testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. Contractor shall deliver all samples

to testing laboratories via overnight courier and shall have the testing report sent directly to the Owner’s Representative. Perform all tests for gradation, organic content, soil chemistry and pH by UMASS Soil and Plant Tissue Laboratory, West Experiment Station, North Pleasant Street, Amherst, MA 01003, (413) 545-2311 or approved equal. Testing reports shall include the following tests and recommendations. Contractor shall deliver samples to testing laboratories and shall have the testing report sent directly to the Owner’s Representative from the Soil and plant Tissue Laboratory. Testing reports shall include the following tests and recommendations.

2. Limestone: Submit supplier's certification that the limestone being supplied conforms to these Specifications

3. Fertilizer : a. Submit product data of seeding fertilizer and certificates showing

composition and analysis. Submit fertilization rates for fertilizer product based upon soil testing, analysis, and recommendations as specified, performed and paid for under in this Section.

4. Testing for Organic Amendment Materials a. Tests shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving in compliance

with ASTM D422 after destruction of organic matter by ignition. b. Test for agricultural suitability analysis as defined in Article 2.02 –

Organic Amendment Materials (Compost). c. Stability assessed by the Solvita procedure, with protocols as specified

by the Solvita manual (version 4.0). Stability tests shall be conducted by Woods End Research Laboratory, Mt. Vernon, Maine, Soil Control laboratory of California, or approved equal.

D. Planting Soil Installation Procedures: Contractor shall submit written program containing

but not limited to the following: 1. Schedules of work 2. Description of the equipment that will be used for transport, compaction and

installation of planting soil on the Project site 3. Cleanup 4. Removal of environmental protections

E. Acceptance of the program does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to conduct the work in strict accordance with the requirements of Federal, State and local



regulations, standards and laws, the Project specifications, or to adequately protect the health and safety of all workers involved in the Project, any members of the public who may be affected by the Project, and the surrounding environmental resources.

F. Product certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that the compost meets the

requirements of this Section. Submit test results compiled within previous 3 months along with written certification by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANTING SOILS

A. Topsoil stripped and stockpiled for reuse under the work of Section 31 1413, SOIL

STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING, of this Specification and amended as required to support seed germination and turf establishment. Amended topsoil shall be Planting Soil. Amend as required to ensure the following: 1. Organic content: between 3.5 and 4.5 percent by weight. 2. The pH shall be between 6.2 and 6.8. 3. Macro and Micro nutrients present by amendment by fertilizer to insure

germination and prosperity. 4. Soil test results have been performed on the existing topsoil and are provided at

the end of this Section. The Owner provides this data for information purposes only and, in so providing, does not relieve the Contractor from performing his/her own tests during the Bid Period or subsequent to Award of Contract.

2.02 ORGANIC AMENDMENT MATERIALS (COMPOST):

A. Compost for amending planting soil on the Project site shall be: 1. Stable, humus-like material produced from the aerobic decomposition of organic

residues consisting of Leaf or Yard Waste Compost which shall be composted for a minimum of one year (12 months). Compost shall be free of debris such as plastics, metal, concrete or other debris and stones larger than 1/2", larger branches and roots and wood chips over 1/2 inches in length or diameter.

2. Compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant growth with appropriate management practices in conjunction with addition of fertilizer and other amendments as applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory tests. a. The ratio of carbon to nitrogen shall be in the range of 12:1 to 25:1 b. The project shall be stable and must achieve a maturity index of 6 or

more as measured by the Solvita scale. Stability tests shall be conducted by Woods End Research Laboratory, Mt. Vernon, Maine, Soil Control laboratory of California, or approved equal.

c. Pathogens/Metals/Vector Attraction reduction shall meet 40 CFR Part 503 rule, Table 3, page 9392, Vol. 58 No. 32, and Commonwealth of Massachusetts 310 CMR 32.00 (for applications to soils with human activity).

d. Organic Content: at least 20 percent (dry weight). One hundred percent of the material shall pass a 3/8-inch (or smaller) screen. Debris such as



metal, glass, plastic, wood (other than residual chips), asphalt or masonry shall not be visible and shall not exceed one percent dry weight. pH: shall be 6.5 to 7.2.

e. Salinity: Electrical conductivity of a one to five soil to water ratio extract shall not exceed 2.0 mOhms/cm (dS/m).

f. Compost: screened to 3/8 inch maximum particle size and shall contain no more that 3 percent material finer that 0.002mm as determined by hydrometer test on ashed material.

2.03 SOIL ADDITIVES

A. General: Soil additives shall be used to counteract soil deficiencies as recommended by

the soils analysis and as supplements for planting soil construction as specified herein. B. Ground limestone for adjustment of planting soils pH shall contain not less than 85

percent of total carbonates and shall be ground to such fineness that 40 percent shall pass through 100 mesh sieve and 95 percent shall pass through a 20 mesh sieve. Contractor shall be aware of planting soils pH and the amount of lime needed to adjust pH to meet the requirements of the testing lab recommendations.

C. Commercial fertilizer shall be a product complying with the State and United States

fertilizer laws. Deliver fertilizer to the site in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis and which shall be furnished to the Owner’s Representative. Fertilizer shall contain not less than the percentages of weight of ingredients as recommended by the soil analysis. 1. One hundred percent of the nitrogen content shall be derived from organic

materials. Nitrogen source shall be coated to ensure slow release. Fertilizer percentages of weight of ingredients shall be as recommended by the soil testing and analysis specified, performed, and paid for under this Section.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 FILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Perform all earthwork in accordance with Sections 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING and 31

2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING, of this Specification. B. Soil decompaction shall be in accordance with Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING.

3.02 FINE GRADING

A. Immediately prior to dumping and spreading planting soil in locations shown on the

Contract Documents, the subgrade shall be cleaned of all stones greater than 2 inches and all debris or rubbish. Such material shall be removed from the site, not raked to the edges and buried. Notify the Owner’s Representative that the subsoil has been cleaned and request his/her attendance on site to review and approve subgrade conditions prior to spreading planting soil.



B. Planting soil shall be protected from erosion at all times. Materials shall be spread as soon as possible after completion of the work of rough grading and excavation and filling has been completed. Refer to requirements Section 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL, of this Specification.

C. Evenly distribute and spread planting soil to uniform depths across the project site. D. No planting soil shall be handled, planted, or seeded in any way if it is in a wet or frozen

condition. A moist planting soil is desirable. E. After planting soil has been spread in turf areas, spread fertilizer and limestone across the

surface of the spread planting soil and till the planting soil to a depth of 6 inches to integrate fertilizer and limestone into the top layer of the planting soil.

F. Remove all large stiff clods, lumps, brush, roots, stumps, litter and other foreign matter

from the planting soil. Remove from unscreened soils all stones over 1 inch in diameter from the top 6 inches of the planting soil bed.

G. Sufficient grade stakes shall be set for checking the finished grades. Stakes must be set

in the bottom of swales and at the top of slopes. Deviation from indicated elevations that are greater than one-tenth of a foot shall not be permitted. Connect contours and spot elevations with an even slope. Finish grades shall be smooth and continuous with no abrupt changes at the top or bottom of slopes.

H. During the compaction process, all depressions caused by settlement or rolling shall be

filled with additional planting soil and the surface shall be re-graded and rolled until presenting a smooth and even finish corresponding to the required grades.

I. The Contractor shall install planting soil in successive horizontal lifts no thicker than 6

inches in turf areas to the required compaction levels as described herein. At the edges of walkways, the Contractor shall install planting soil at a higher level to anticipate any reduction of planting soil volume due to settling during the warranty period.

1. Compact planting soil to the required density as specified herein. 2. Maximum dry density for planting soil shall be determined in accordance with

ASTM D698. In turf and planting beds and tree pits the following percentages of minimum to maximum dry densities shall be achieved:

Minimum Maximum 83% 86%

3. The surface area of each lift shall be scarified by raking prior to placing the next lift.

J. In addition to the range cited above, compact each lift sufficiently to reduce settling but

not enough to prevent the movement of water and feeder roots through the soil. The planting soil in each lift should feel firm to the foot in all areas and make only slight heel prints. At completion of the planting soil installation, the soil should offer a firm, even resistance when a soil sampling tube is inserted from lift to lift. In the presence of the Owner’s Representative, probe installed planting soil with a Penetrometer to verify that



planting soil compaction is no greater than the existing conditions probed at the start of the Contract.

K. Select equipment and otherwise phase the installation of the planting soil to ensure that

equipment does not travel over already installed soil. Contractor shall back his way out of the project site.

L. Disturbed areas outside the limit of lawn work shall be graded smooth and spread with a

minimum of 6 inches of planting soil to the finished grade. M. Contractor shall be responsible to use all existing topsoil on site. Export of topsoil shall

not be permitted. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE

A. Confirm that the final grade of the planting soil is at the proper finish grade elevations.

Adjust grade as required to meet the contours and spot elevations noted on the Plans. Request the presence of the Owner’s Representative to inspect final grade. Do not proceed with the remaining work of this Contract until the Owner’s Representative has given his/her written approval of the final grade.

3.04 SOIL TEST RESULTS





A. The work of topsoil preparation, providing and admixing organic amendments and soil

additives into the topsoil, filling, compaction and decompaction, fine grading, removal of



surplus materials, frost protection, dust control, protection, clean up and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of the items specified herein.

B. Item No. 32 9119.01 LANDSCAPE GRADING will be measured PER CUBIC YARD

performed as specified herein, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by a payment item. Such price shall


4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

32 9119.01 LANDSCAPE GRADING CUBIC YARD

END OF SECTION


32 9200 - 1 PLANTING

SECTION 32 9200 PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS





1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to perform all planting work and related items as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified in this Section and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Planting trees, shrubs, grasses and perennials. 2. Staking trees. 3. Planting maintenance. 4. One year guarantee period for all plants. 5. Providing and placing backfill mix.


A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1 Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 2. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 3. Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 4. Section 32 9220 LAWNS

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the work of this Section. 1. Hortus III, 1976, L. H. Bailey Hortorium. 2. Tree and Shrub Transplanting Manual, E.B. Himelick, 1991, International

Society of Arboriculture. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock, latest edition, published by American Association of Nurserymen (AAN).



1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. At least 30 days prior to the first day of the planting season described in this Section submit to the Owner’s Representative proof of certification of Foreman or Crew Leader as a Massachusetts Certified Landscape Professional or Massachusetts Certified Horticulturist in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE paragraph of this Section.

B. Submit proof of landscape contractor's experience to the Owner’s Representative in

accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE paragraph of this Section. C. At least 30 days prior to ordering materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s

Representative samples, certifications, manufacturer's product data and certified test results for materials as specified below. No materials shall be ordered or delivered until the required submittals have been reviewed and approved by the Owner’s Representative. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. Approval shall not constitute final acceptance. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to reject, on or after delivery, any material which does not meet these Specifications.

D. Material Sampling and Testing:

1. Material Sampling and Testing of on-site planting soil shall be specified, performed and paid for under the work of the Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING of this Specification.

2. Planting Mulch: Submit one quart sample in plastic zip lock bag. 3. Mycorrhizal Fungal Inoculant: manufacturer's product data. 4. Tree Staking System: Submit manufacturer's product data of system. 5. Soil Additives: Submit manufacturer’s product data for all soil additives.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS

A. All areas to be planted shall be inspected by the Contractor before starting work and any defects such as incorrect grading or inadequate drainage shall be reported to the Owner’s Representative prior to beginning this work.


A. Qualification of Landscape Contractor: The work of this Section shall be performed by a landscape contracting firm which has successfully installed work of a similar quality, schedule requirement, and construction detailing with a minimum of five years experience. Proof of this experience shall be submitted per SUBMITTALS paragraph of this Section.

B. Qualification of Foreman or Crew Leader: All work of unloading, stockpiling, storing,

transporting on-site, planting, staking, fertilizing, and maintenance of trees, shrubs, grasses and perennials shall be supervised by a foreman or crew leader who is a certified landscape professional or a certified horticulturist. 1. Landscape professional shall be a Massachusetts Certified Landscape

Professional certified by the Associated Landscape Contractors of Massachusetts.



2. Certification shall be current. Proof of certification shall be submitted per SUBMITTALS paragraph of this Section.

C. Qualification of Arborist: All work of pruning shall be performed by an arborist certified

by the Massachusetts Arborist Association or the International Society of Arboriculture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANTING SOIL

A. Planting soil for planting shall be stripped and stockpiled topsoil per Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING, and amended according to Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING.

2.02 SOIL ADDITIVES

A. Soil additives for all planting soil shall be specified, provided, installed and paid for under Section 32 9119, of this Specification.

2.03 GRADES AND STANDARDS OF PLANTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish all plants shown on the Contract Documents, as specified, and in quantities listed on the PLANT LIST. No substitutions will be permitted, without written approval by the Owner’s Representative. All plants shall be nursery grown.

B. All plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have a normal habit of

growth and be legibly tagged with the proper name. C. Plants shall be in accordance with ASNS Standards of the American Association of

Nurserymen except as noted in this Section. Botanical plant names shall be in accordance with plant designations included in Hortus III.

D. All deciduous trees shall meet the following standards:

1. Trees shall have a single, straight trunk, well formed, and sturdy. No part of the trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with normal trees of the same variety.

2. All pruning wounds shall show vigorous bark on all edges at the time of harvest. Trees shall be free from all signs of pest and disease damage. The trunk shall be free from sun scald, frost cracks, and wounds resulting from abrasions, fire, animal damage, or other causes.

3. Pruning scars within the crown of any tree shall be clean cut and shall leave no protrusion beyond the branch collar.

4. All trees shall have healthy, vigorous leaves of normal size, color, shape, and texture for the particular species and variety.

5. Deciduous shade trees shall have fall color typical for their species and variety. 6. Unless otherwise indicated on the PLANT LIST, the height and spread of

deciduous shade trees shall be the minimum requirements.



7. Take caliper measurements for deciduous trees 6 inches above ground level up to and including 4 inches caliper size.

8. No deciduous tree shall be pruned after the Owner’s Representative has tagged the plant in the nursery except as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

9. Unless otherwise noted on the PLANT LIST, shade trees for use in lawn areas shall have no branches lower than 5 feet from finish grade and no higher than 6.5 feet from finish grade.

E. All shrubs shall meet the following standards:

1. Shrubs shall be healthy and vigorous plants which are very well shaped, heavily branched, densely foliated, and true to form for the variety.

2. Canes or Trunk(s) and Branches: a. Well formed and sturdy. b. Branching shall be uniformly distributed close to the ground. c. Scars shall be free of rot and not exceed 1/4 the diameter of the wood

beneath in greatest dimension unless completely healed (except pruning scars).

d. Pruning scars shall be clean cut and shall leave little or no protrusion from the trunk or branch.

e. Graft unions shall be completely healed. f. No suckers or water sprouts. g. Contain no dead wood. h. Free of cracks, splits, or cambium peeling.

3. No shrub with pest or mechanical damage will be accepted. 4. Shrubs shall show no signs of frost or winter damage to the foliage. Foliage shall

not be in a state of drought stress. Leaves shall show no signs of wilt or desiccation due to weather stress at any season of the year.

F. All grasses and perennials shall meet the following standards:

1. Perennials and grasses shall be listed in the PLANT LIST. 2. Perennials and grasses shall be healthy and well cared for, with no evidence of

insects or diseases present. Insect-ridden or diseased plants shall be rejected. Plants shall have a deep green foliage and dense, compact growth. Perennials and grasses shall have multistemmed bases and shall be two year potted stock minimum, one year in cutting bench and one year in pots.

2.04 ROOT SYSTEMS FOR ALL PLANTS

A. Each plant shall have an extensive, symmetrically balanced fibrous root system. Any

root ball which shows signs of asymmetry, girdling, injury, or damage to the root system shall be rejected.

B. Curling or spiraling of the roots along the walls of rigid containers will not be accepted.

Curling, spiraling or girdling roots within balled and burlapped material will not be accepted.

C. All parts of the fibrous root system of all plants shall be moist and fresh with a white

color when washed of soil. When the plant is removed from the container, the visible



root mass shall be healthy with white root tips. The root systems of all plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae.

D. All trees must be moved with the root systems as solid units with balls of earth firmly

wrapped with untreated 8 ounce natural, biodegradable fabric burlap, firmly laced with stout, natural biodegradable cord or twine. The base of the tree trunks shall be wrapped with a protective burlap layer, surrounded by a cardboard trunk protector, and loosely tied with twine.

E. The diameter and depth of the balls of earth must encompass the fibrous and root feeding

system necessary for the healthy recovery of the plant. Minimum root ball diameters and depths shall be in accordance with ASNS standards.

F. No plants shall be loose in the container. G. Container grown plants which have roots growing out of the container will be rejected.

2.05 MYCORRHIZAL FUNGAL INOCULANT

A. Mycorrhizal fungal inoculant shall be live spores packaged in plastic packets. At a

minimum each packet of inoculant shall contain the following: 1. Live spores of VA Endomycorrhizal fungi: Vesicular-Arbuscular mycorrihizae

fungi, minimum of 6 species. 2. Live spores of Ectomycorrhizal fungi: including Pisolithus tinctorius.

2.06 PLANTING SOIL MIX

A. Planting soil mix shall be existing topsoil stockpiled under the requirements of Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING that has been pH adjusted according to particular planting applications and improved through the addition of organic matter as directed below. Planting loam shall conform to the following pH levels: 1. Planting soil mix for general planting shall have a true pH value of 6.0 to 6.5.

Planting soil mix shall be amended by the Contractor at his own expense to the proper pH range by mixing with dolomitic limestone.

2. The amount of either sulfur or limestone required to adjust the planting soil mix to the proper pH range shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative on the basis of soil tests as specified under the work of Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING.

3. Planting soil mix for use in grass and perennial planting shall consist of pH adjusted loam which has been thoroughly premixed with organic material in the proportions of one part organic matter with 5 parts of planting soil. Organic material shall be specified in Section 32 9119.

2.07 TREE STAKING MATERIALS

A. Tree staking: Tree stakes shall be a below-grade stabilizing system designed to secure

root balls into subsoil, structural planting medium and planting soil back fill without use of above ground components.



1. Stakes shall be fabricated from steel pipe per ASTM A53 and flat bar stock per ASTM A36. Steel shall be lightly oiled to prevent scale and rust from forming prior to installation.

2. Stakes shall be as shown on the Contract Documents. 3. Stakes shall be sized to accommodate tree sizes noted herein. At a minimum

below-grade stakes shall have long prong 42 inches in length, short prong 12 inches in length and connecting bar stock 12 inches in length.

4. Provide a minimum of three stakes per tree.

2.08 MULCH

A. Bark Mulch: Mulch shall be high quality, double-ground, premium bark mulch of hemlock, spruce and pine bark singularly or mix thereof. Mulch shall have been aged for a minimum of six months and not longer than two years. Bark mulch shall be shredded to a uniform size; free of dirt, debris and foreign matter; with pieces no thicker than 1/4 inch. Mulch must be free of stringy material or chunks over 3 inches in size and shall not contain, in the judgment of the Owner’s Representative, an excess of fine particles.

2.09 WATER

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish his own supply of water to the site at no

extra cost. If possible, the Owner’s Representative shall furnish the Contractor upon request with an adequate source and supply of water at no charge. However, if the Owner’s Representative's water supply is not available or not functioning, the Contractor shall be responsible to furnish adequate supplies at his own cost. All work injured or damaged due to the lack of water, or the use of too much water, shall be the Contractor's responsibility to correct. Water shall be free from impurities injurious to vegetation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLANTING

A. Furnishing and planting of plant material shall include, but shall not be limited to, the digging of planting pits and plant beds, amendment of loam as required to produce planting soil mix, provision of soil additives required to adjust for pH requirements of specific plants, furnishing the plants as specified as well as the labor of planting, fertilizing, and maintenance.

B. Prior to spreading of planting topsoil, subgrades shall have been tested to determine if they

are too compact to drain water as specified, performed and paid for under the work of Section 32 9119.

C. The Contractor shall locate plant material sources and ensure that plants are shipped in

timely fashion for installation.



D. Contractor shall locate all existing underground utilities that are within 10 feet of the proposed planting pits and notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts prior to digging plant pits.

E. Seasons for Planting:

1. Spring: Deciduous materials - April 30 through May 30. 2. Fall: Deciduous materials - October 1 through November 15.

F. Plant Material Inspection:

1. At least two weeks prior to the expected planting date, the Contractor shall request that the Owner’s Representative provide a representative to select and tag stock to be planted under this Section. The Contractor shall pay for the transportation and overnight accommodations, if necessary, for the Owner’s Representative's representative during the period of time required to select and tag the plant material.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible to certify the availability of quality plants in specified sizes from his/her sources of supply prior to requesting that the Owner’s Representative make plant source inspections. In the event that plants at the inspection location are found to be unavailable or of insufficient size, the Contractor shall be liable to reimburse the Owner’s Representative for all costs of the Owner’s Representative's hourly services which are incurred during unproductive inspection trips.

3. All trees for the project shall be individually tagged for approval with the Owner’s Representative's seals, and no trees shall be accepted for delivery to the site without such seals. Representative samples only of shrubs and ground cover plants may be tagged or marked for approval as an "Approved Typical Sample" and shipped to the site. Any shrub, perennial or grass plant that arrives at the construction site that does not meet the Approved Typical Sample will be rejected by the Owner’s Representative.

4. Plants to be inspected shall be in locations and conditions that allow direct and un-obscured inspection by the Owner’s Representative. Container grown or balled and burlapped shrubs shall be pulled from holding blocks by the nurseryman for scrutiny by the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner’s Representative. Harvested trees held in storage shall not have branches tied up. Harvested trees shall not have trunks obscured by burlap, cardboard trunk protection, or other devices that would otherwise obscure inspection. In the event that branches are tied up, trunks are obscured by burlap or cardboard trunk protection, or root flares hidden by burlap and twine and the Owner’s Representative cannot inspect root flares, trunks or branching habit, the Contractor shall bear all responsibility and costs associated with tree rejection at a later date during the course of the Contract.

5. Inspection and approval of plants at the source shall not impair the right of subsequent inspection and rejection upon delivery to the site, or during the progress of the work if the Owner’s Representative finds that plants do not meet the requirements of the PLANT LIST or this Contract, have declined noticeably due to handling abuse, lack of maintenance, or other causes. Cost of replacements, as required, shall be borne by the Contractor.



G. Planting: 1. Notify the Owner’s Representative three working days prior to the proposed

arrival of plant material on the site. If not planted within 24 hours of delivery to the site, all plants shall be maintained in an on-site nursery in a shaded location. All plants delivered to the site and not planted within 24 hours of delivery shall have their root balls covered with mulch and shall be watered on a daily basis such that root balls are kept moist throughout.

2. Locations for all plants shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Notify the Owner’s Representative no less than 3 days prior to desired date of inspection of staking to schedule site visit.

3. Provide minimum soil volumes for plants as follows: a. Shrub and Perennial plant beds: depth of 18 inches of planting soil. b. Shade trees as single, solitary specimens: 75 cubic feet minimum per tree.

4. All plant beds dug with a machine shall have the sides of the holes scraped with hand shovels to prevent glazing or compaction of the sides of the hole. Remove and stockpile excavated planting soil for reuse as backfill for plant beds. All subsoil excavated from the bottoms of planting beds shall be removed from the construction site.

5. All plant beds within 36 inches of pavement, curbing or walls shall be hand dug. Remove and stockpile excavated planting soil for reuse as backfill for plant beds. All subsoil excavated from the bottoms of planting pits shall be removed from the site.

6. Perennial Plant Beds: a. Place sufficient planting soil mix to provide full and continuous 18-inch

depth beds. Remove plants from their pots immediately before planting. Handle plants carefully to prevent damaging roots. Place each plant in individual hole and firm the planting mix around the roots. Water thoroughly and mulch as shown on the Contract Documents.

7. All plant roots and earth balls must be damp and thoroughly protected from sun and wind from the beginning of the digging operation, during transportation, and at the site until the final planting.

8. Prior to completion of planting installations, remove rope and cut wire baskets from the top 1/3 of the root balls. Pull burlap away from the trunk or stem of the plant and cut burlap from the top 1/3 of the root balls.

9. A saucer shall be formed around each tree at a depth of 3 inches. Saucers shall have diameter 3 times greater than the root ball of the tree.

10. Fertilizer shall be spread over the planting soil of the plant saucer (trees) and plant beds. Do not spread compost until placement of the fertilizer has been verified by the Owner’s Representative. Fertilizer application rates shall be as determined by soil testing, analysis, and testing laboratory recommendations specified, performed and paid for under Section 32 9119, LANDSCAPE GRADING.

11. After fertilizer has been spread in plant beds, spread compost to a depth of 2 inches and till the planting soil to a depth of 8 inches to integrate compost into the top layer of the planting soil.

12. All plants shall be inoculated with mycorrhizal fungi. Inoculant shall be added after the plants have been placed in their holes.



a. Mycorrhizal fungal inoculant shall be added to the plant pits according to plant size.

b. The application rates for mycorrhizal fungal packets shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

c. Submit the purchasing receipt showing the total quantity purchased for the project prior to installation. Submit empty packets of fungal spore inoculant to the Owner’s Representative for verification of use.

I. All plants shall be watered immediately following planting as necessary to thoroughly

moisten rootball and plant bed within vicinity of the rootball and thereafter shall be inspected frequently for watering needs and watered, as required, to provide adequate moisture in the planting pit. The Contractor shall inspect plant beds 24 hours after initial watering to confirm that they are draining properly. If surface water or excessively saturated soils exist, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. The Owner’s Representative will recommend remedial measures based upon site conditions.

J. Keeping Trees Plumb:

1. Contractor shall keep trees plumb and upright at all times. 2. All trees shall be firmly staked with approved below-grade stabilizing system at

the time of planting. Stakes shall be installed as follows: a. After trees have been backfilled but prior to forming saucer install below-

grade staking system. b. Place stakes so that the long prongs are set at 120 degree points around root

ball. Long prongs shall be set against edge of rootballs but shall not pierce burlap of ball's vertical face.

c. Short prongs shall be placed in a counter clockwise rotation around top of rootball. Horizontal bar stock and short prongs shall be placed no closer than 4 inches from the trunk of the tree. In no circumstances shall horizontal bar stock press against visible root flares.

d. Drive long prongs into the subsoil, planting soil, structural planting medium to full depth so that horizontal bar is pressed firmly into burlap and top surface of rootball. Short prongs shall be driven into the rootball so that top of short prongs will not protrude above bark mulch.

e. Rake out planting soil around and above rootball to ensure a smooth surface with intact saucer.

K. Mulch material shall be placed over entire saucer areas of individual trees and over the

entire area of planting beds to a depth of 2 inches after settlement, not later than one week after planting. Do not apply mulch prior to the first watering of plant materials. Do not apply mulch prior to placement of surface applied fertilizer and verification of placement by the Owner’s Representative.

L. Pruning:

1. As directed by the Owner’s Representative, each plant shall be pruned in accordance with the workmanship requirements of "Pruning Standards" for Class I, fine pruning, to preserve the natural character of the plant.

2. Tree pruning, as required, shall be undertaken to the full height of affected trees.


32 9200 - 10 PLANTING

3. All dead wood or suckers and all broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed. Never cut a leader.

M. In the event that rock or underground construction work or obstructions are encountered

in any plant pit or bed excavation work, alternate locations will be selected by the Owner’s Representative. Relocation of plant pits or beds shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner’s Representative. Provide the Owner’s Representative with no less than 48 hours notice of obstruction so that a site visit can be scheduled to establish new locations for plants.

N. Absolutely no debris may be left on the site. Repair any damage to site as directed by the

Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost.

3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue for 12

months following Final Acceptance. B. Maintenance shall consist of keeping the plants in a healthy growing condition and shall

include but is not limited to watering, weeding, cultivating, pruning, re-mulching, straightening of trees to a plumb position, removal of dead material, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, and maintaining the planting saucer.

C. During the maintenance period, any decline in the condition of plantings shall require the

Contractor to take immediate action to identify potential problems and undertake corrective measures. If required, the Contractor shall engage professional arborists and/or horticulturalists to inspect plant materials and to identify problems and recommend corrective procedures. The Owner’s Representative shall be immediately advised of such actions. Inspection and recommendation reports shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative.

3.04 ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon completion of all planting work, the Contractor shall request in writing that the Owner’s Representative formally inspect the planting work.

B. If plant materials and workmanship are acceptable, the Owner’s Representative will

issue a written Certificate of Acceptance to the Contractor. C. Acceptance Standards at end of the Monitoring Period: If plant material is reviewed

when it is in full leaf, leaves shall be plump with water with a shape indicative of the species and shall be free of insect, pest and disease damage. Twigs shall have living cambium for their full length. Twigs and branches shall have a full bud set for their full length, including terminal buds. Trunks and branches shall be free of frost cracks; sun scald; damage due to insects, pests, and disease; structural defects; and damage resulting from machinery or tools. Plant material inspected and reviewed when the plants are not in full leaf shall have twigs, branches and trunks meeting the above requirements. All plants regardless of the season of review shall have a minimum of 75 percent healthy,


32 9200 - 11 PLANTING

balanced branching structure with a healthy terminal leader(s) with viable terminal bud(s).

D. If any number of plants does not meet these Acceptance Standards at the time of

inspection, or if in the Owner’s Representative's opinion, workmanship is unacceptable, written notice will be given by the Owner’s Representative to the Contractor in the form of a punch list, which itemizes necessary planting replacements and/or other deficiencies to be remedied. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all plants shall be extended until replacements are made or other deficiencies are corrected. All plants that do not meet these Acceptance Standards shall be removed from the project within seven days of receipt of the punch list. Replacements shall conform in all respects to the Specifications for new plants and shall be planted in the same manner

E. Following the correction of all Punch List deficiencies, the Contractor shall request in

writing that the Owner’s Representative formally inspect the planting work. If plant materials and workmanship are acceptable, the Owner’s Representative will issue a written Certificate of Acceptance to the Contractor.

3.05 GUARANTEE

A. The date of the Certificate of Acceptance shall establish the beginning of the

maintenance period and the commencement of the required one-year guarantee and establishment period for planting work.

B. At the end of the guarantee and establishment period, a final inspection will be held to

determine whether any plant material replacements are required. Each plant shall be plumb, shall have a character that is natural for its species as determined by the Owner’s Representative, and shall conform to the Acceptance Standards described in this Section. Plants found to be unacceptable shall be removed promptly from the site and replaced according to this Section. A final inspection will be made after the replacement plants have lived through one year.


A. Tree stakes, planting soil mix, inoculants, mulch, watering, plant material inspections, maintenance and guarantees, and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 32 9200.01 DECIDUOUS TREES will be measured per EACH, installed

complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.


32 9200 - 12 PLANTING

C. Item No. 32 9200.02 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS will be measured per EACH, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

D. Item No. 32 9200.03 GRASSES will be measured as a LUMP SUM, installed complete

and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.

E. Item No. 32 9200.04 PERENNIALS will be measured as a LUMP SUM, installed

complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.


A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by payment item. Such price shall


4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

32 9200.01 DECIDUOUS TREES EACH 32 9200.02 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS EACH 32 9200.03 GRASSES LUMP SUM 32 9200.04 PERENNIALS LUMP SUM

END OF SECTION


32 9220 - 1 LAWNS

SECTION 32 9220 LAWNS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to perform all turf installation work and related items as indicated on the Contract Documents and/or as specified in this Section and includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Seeded Permanent Turf 2. Maintenance and protection


A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1 Section 31 1413 SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 2. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 3. Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 4. Section 32 9200 PLANTING

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. B. Federal Specification JJJ-S-181b, Seeds, Agricultural. C. Federal Specification O-F-241c (1), Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. D. MHD: "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges", Massachusetts Highway

Department, Commonwealth of Massachusetts, latest edition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. At 10 working days prior to the first day of the seeding season described in this Section,

submit to the Owner’s Representative proof of certification of Foreman or Crew Leader as Massachusetts Certified Landscape Professional or Massachusetts Certified Horticulturist in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE paragraph of this Section.

B. Submit proof of landscape contractor's experience to the Owner’s Representative in

accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE paragraph of this Section.


32 9220 - 2 LAWNS

C. At least 10 working days prior to intended use, the Contractor shall provide the following samples and submittals for approval in conformance with the requirements of Division 1 Section, SUBMITTALS. Do not order materials until Owner’s Representative’s approval of samples, certifications or test results has been obtained. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. Acceptance shall not constitute final acceptance. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to reject on or after delivery any material that does not meet these Specifications. 1. Fertilizer:

a. Submit product literature of seeding fertilizer and certificates showing composition and analysis.

2. Seed: Submit a manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance to the Specifications with each shipment of seed. These certificates shall include the guaranteed percentages of purity, weed content and germination of the seed, and also the net weight and date of shipment. No seed may be sown until the Contractor has submitted the certificates.

3. Limestone: Submit supplier's certification that the limestone being supplied conforms to these Specifications.

4. Coir Woven Mat. 5. All additives needed to amend a specific soil in order to meet these

specifications.

1.06 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS A. All areas to be improved shall be inspected by the Contractor before starting work and

any defects such as incorrect grading, or drainage problems shall be reported to the Owner’s Representative prior to beginning this work. The commencement of work by the Contractor shall indicate his acceptance of the areas to be improved, and he shall assume full responsibility for the work of this Section 32 9220 LAWNS.

B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for judging the full extent of work

requirements involved. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualification of Landscape Contractor: The work of this Section 32 9200 LAWNS shall be performed by a landscape contracting firm which has successfully installed work of a similar quality, schedule requirement, and construction with a minimum of five years experience. Proof of this experience shall be submitted per SUBMITTALS paragraph of this Section 32 9220 LAWNS.

B. Qualification of Foreman or Crew Leader: All work of lawn installation shall be

supervised by a foreman or crew leader who is a certified landscape professional or a certified horticulturist. 1. Landscape professional shall be a Massachusetts Certified Landscape

Professional certified by the Associated Landscape Contractors of Massachusetts.


32 9220 - 3 LAWNS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANTING SOIL

A. Planting soil shall be specified, provided, installed and paid for under the work of the Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING of this Specification.

2.02 SOIL ADDITIVES

A. Soil additives shall be specified, provided and paid under Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE

GRADING, of this Specification except for additional applications of fertilizer that shall be specified, provided and paid for under this Section 32 9220 LAWNS based upon recommendations from soil analysis and testing as specified, performed and paid for under the Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING of this Specification.

2.03 SEED

A. Seed mixture shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed. Grasses shall be of the previous year's

crop and in no case shall the weed seed content exceed 0.25% by weight. The seed shall be furnished and delivered in the proportion specified below in new, clean, sealed and properly labeled containers. All seed shall comply with State and Federal seed laws. Submit manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance. Wet, moldy or otherwise damaged seed shall not be accepted. Fescues and Ryegrass shall contain Acremonium endophytes. Seed containing endophytes must be kept cool and dry at all times; do not stockpile in sunlight. All turf grasses shall be ranked within the top 15 percent of the Rutgers University New Jersey Agricultural Experiment Station Turf Trials or local equivalent. Submit certifications of such. 1. Permanent Grass Seed Mix

a. Grass Seed Mix shall be the Richey & Clapper Three Way Mix, or

approved equal. Seeding rate shall be 6 - 8 pounds of pure live seed mix per 1000 square feet. The Contractor shall be responsible for achieving the Pure Live Seeding rate based upon purity and germination of the seed mix supplied.

Proportion Percent Percent By Percentage Purity Germination Creeping Red Fescue 33% 97% 85% Brooklyn KYB 85/80 33% 90% 80% Allaire II Perennial Ryegrass 34% 96% 90% Other Crop Seeds .75%

2.04 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer shall be a commercial product complying with the State and United States

fertilizer laws. Deliver to the site in the original unopened containers that shall bear the manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis. Fertilizer shall contain not less than the percentages of weight of ingredients as recommended by the soil analysis.


32 9220 - 4 LAWNS

B. Nitrogen fertilizer shall be slowly soluble ureaformaldehyde, methylene urea, or isobutylidene diurea; or slow release sulfur-coated urea.

C. Phosphorus shall be superphosphate or triple superphosphate. D. Potassium shall be sulfate of potash, K2SO4.

E. Salt indexes per unit of nutrient for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium shall be less

than 1.0 when compared to sodium nitrate (6.3).

2.05 LIMESTONE

A. Limestone shall conform to the requirements of Division III Subsection M6.01.0, except that limestone shall be pelletized, dolomitic limestone.

2.06 HERBICIDES AND INSECTICIDES

A. Herbicides and Insecticides shall not be used.

2.07 WATER

A. Contractor shall provide all labor and water required to establish turf. During the

establishment period the Contractor shall water as required to insure that soil moisture is maintained to a sufficient depth to ensure germination and establishment. 1. Watering shall be done in a manner that will provide uniform coverage, prevent

erosion due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to the finished surface by the watering equipment. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient watering equipment to maintain required water levels in the soil.

2. Water shall not contain elements toxic to plant life. 3. Coordinate with Section 01 1500 for availability of water from hydrant for use on

this Project. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Filling and compaction of loam shall be specified, performed and paid for under the work

of the Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING, of this Specification. 3.02 SOIL PREPARATION FOR TURF AREAS

A. Fine grading shall be specified, performed and paid for under the work of the Section 32

9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING of this Specification. B. Immediately before seeding, planting soil shall be restored to an even condition. All

rocks greater than 2 inch diameter and which are in the top two (2) inches shall be removed.


32 9220 - 5 LAWNS

3.03 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER AND LIME FOR TURF AREAS

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING.

3.04 TURF ESTABLISHMENT – GENERAL A. It is an essential aspect of this Contract to establish a full and healthy turf landscape

meeting the needs of the Owner, in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and as directed by the Owner Representative.

B. Contractor shall obtain Owner’s Representative’s written approval of fine grading work

before doing any seeding. C. All turf areas disturbed by the contractor that is the result of negligence of the contractor

or any of his assigns outside the limit of seeding shall be prepared and seeded as specified herein and as directed by the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost.

3.05 GENERAL SEEDING PRINCIPLES

A. The following principles shall be applied to all seeding activities.

1. Protect all planting soils against erosion and sedimentation. Schedule seeding operations to avoid loss of planting soil.

2. The seedbed shall be weed free, clod-free, smooth, firm but not overly compacted and moist but not wet.

3. Apply seed at times of the year when weed competition is at its lowest. 4. Apply seed in a manner that provides direct seed to soil contact. Seed application

system employed by the Contractor that does not apply seed directly to the surface of the soil or cultivates the seed into the soil shall be rejected.

5. Keep seed moist throughout the germination period. 6. Light and temperature play a key role in successful germination. Manage seeding

operations to utilize light and temperature to the greatest advantage. 3.06 SEEDING

A. The season for seeding shall be from August 15 to October 15. The actual planting of

seed shall be done, however, only during periods within this specified fall season that are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions, by accepted practice in this locality and as approved by the Owner’s Representative. Schedule seeding operations to insure seeding and placement of coir woven fabric by November 15th.

B. To prevent loss of soil via water and wind erosion and to prevent the flow of sediment

and fertilizer onto roadways, sidewalks, and into catch basins, seed turf areas within 5 Days of spreading and fine grading the planting soil.

C. Seed only when the bed is in a friable condition, not muddy or hard.

D. Means and methods of seeding shall be determined by the Contractor based on his/her

experience, site conditions, season of seeding, weather conditions and any, all or other environmental conditions. Seeding of turf may be by Conventional Seeding Method, Hydroseeding, Drill Seeding or other method selected by the Contractor.


32 9220 - 6 LAWNS

E. Following application of seed apply bonded fiber matrix to the all seeded areas at rates

established by the manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.07 WATERING OF TURF AREAS

A. Establish turf. To that end application of supplemental irrigation water may be required.

Contractor shall monitor available soil moisture to determine whether off-site water is required to supplement rainfall and meet the required turf establishment deadline.

B. Apply water to the turf areas immediately following installation at a rate sufficient to

ensure thorough wetting of the soil to a depth of at least 2 inches. Supervise watering operation to prevent run-off. Supply all pumps, hoses, pipelines, and sprinkling equipment. Repair all areas damaged by water operations.

3.08 FERTILIZING TURF

A. Fertilizing: The first application of fertilizer is specified, provided, performed and paid

for under Section 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING. A second application of fertilizer shall be applied to seeded areas at the time of the first mowing and shall be performed and paid for under this Section. This second application shall be applied at a rate that ensures that one pound of nitrogen is applied to each 1,000 square feet. Phosphorus and potassium shall be applied proportionally in accordance with the recommendations of the soil tests and the quantities previously integrated into the soil during the first application. A third application of nitrogen fertilizer shall be applied to seeded areas approximately two months after the second application and shall be paid for under this Section. This third application shall correspond to the following application rates dependent upon the month of application. 1. May 1-15: Apply one-half pound nitrogen per 1000 square feet. 2. June 15-30: Apply one-half pound nitrogen per 1000 square feet. 3. August 15 through September 15: Apply one-half pound nitrogen per 1000

square feet. 3.09 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after any area is seeded and shall continue until

Acceptance by the Owner’s Representative. B. Maintenance shall include reseeding, mowing, watering, weeding, fertilizing as specified

herein. Turf work maintenance shall also include chemical treatments as required for fungus and/or pest control.

C. During the maintenance period, any decline in the condition of seeded areas shall require

immediate action to identify potential problems and to undertake corrective measures. D. Watering shall be done in a manner that will provide uniform coverage, prevent erosion

due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to the finished surface by the watering equipment.

E. After the grass in seeded areas has germinated, reseed all areas and parts of areas that fail


32 9220 - 7 LAWNS

to show a uniform stand of grass. Reseed such areas and parts of areas repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass with no bare spots greater than 6 square inches. Reseeding together with necessary grading, fertilizing, and trimming shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

3.10 TURF ACCEPTANCE

A. Following the minimum required maintenance periods for turf construction, the

Contractor shall request the Owner’s Representative in writing for a formal inspection of the completed work. Request for inspection shall be received by the Owner’s Representative at least 10 Days before anticipated date of inspection.

B. Acceptance Requirements

1. At the end of the maintenance period, seeded areas shall have a close stand of grass with no weeds present and no bare spots greater than 6 square inches over greater than 5 percent of the overall seeded area as determined by the Owner’s Representative, who shall be the final judge of acceptance of turf. At least 90 percent of the grass established shall be permanent grass species. If seeded areas are deficient, the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all seeded areas shall be extended until deficiencies are corrected. Seeded areas to be corrected shall be prepared and reseeded in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

2. At the time of acceptance, the Contractor shall remove temporary barriers and coir fabric used to protect turf areas.

3. Contractor shall mow turf areas once following full acceptance. 3.11 RESTORATION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Absolutely no debris may be left on the site. Excavated material shall be removed as

directed. Repair any damage to site or structures to restore them to their original condition, as directed by the Owner’s Representative, at no cost to the Owner.


A. Soil amendments, fertilizing, watering, protection and maintenance and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

B. Item No. 32 9220.01 SEEDED PERMANENT TURF will be measured per SQUARE

FOOT, installed complete and in place, including all labor, materials and equipment required or incidental for the satisfactory completion of the work.


32 9220 - 8 LAWNS



4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

32 9220.01 SEEDED PERMANENT TURF SQUARE FOOT

END OF SECTION

Blank Page


33 0000-1 SITE UTILITIES

SECTION 33 0000 SITE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS





1.02 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to utility piping and leaching basins.



Specifications: 1. Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK 2. Section 31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 3. Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 4. Section 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation

instructions for leaching system materials and products. Descriptive literature showing pipe dimensions, pipe and joint materials, and other details for each class or type of pipe or product to be furnished for this contract. All pipe furnished under the contract shall be manufactured in accordance with these Specifications.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The following standards are applicable to the work of this Section to the extent referenced herein: 1. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 3. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.




A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with local environmental regulations pertaining to storm drainage systems.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with State Environmental Code. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Town

or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Contractor is responsible for coordinating the installation of the subsurface Storm water system with the installation of permanent structures on site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATES

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 31 0510 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK.

2.02 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. High Density Polyethylene Drain Pipe (HDPE) shall be smooth-wall interior pipe conforming to AASHTO M294.

B. PVC Sleeve shall be solid, heavy-duty PVC pipe of a size according to the Drawings. 2.03 LEACHING BASIN

A. Leaching basin shall be constructed from 18” diameter, heavy duty, perforated PVC pipe.

B. Cover shall be solid, heavy-duty PVC of a diameter to snugly fit the leaching basin pipe.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling shall be as specified under the work of Sections 31 2300 and 31 2333.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping and leaching basin. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install in coordination with work of Section 13 1213 FOUNTAIN MECHANICAL

SYSTEM. C. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of

pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Contract Drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of the leaching system piping. Install the piping as indicated, to the extent practical. Any modifications to the layout of the leaching drainage system shall be submitted to the Town’s Representative for review and approval at least five days prior to the start of the affected work.

B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated

with unbroken continuity of invert. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. All piping shall be laid in the dry.

C. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow as indicated on the Contract Drawings

and in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. Acceptance of Pipe: Acceptance will be on the basis of tests specified herein before. The

quality of all materials used in the pipe, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to review by the Engineer. Inspection may be made at the place of manufacture, or on the work site after delivery or at both places and the pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specification requirements, even though sample pipe units may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. All pipe which is rejected shall be immediately removed from the project site by the Contractor.

E. Pipe Storage: Pipe sections shall not be stored on areas over the newly laid pipe or other

pipelines which might be damaged by the superimposed load, and storage sections shall be restricted to approved areas.



F. Laying Pipe: The pipe shall be laid in sand bedding. In trenches, no blocking or supporting of the piping by concrete, stones, bricks, wooden wedges, or method other than bedding the pipe on sand will be permitted. Each length of pipe shall be shoved home against the pipe previously laid and held securely in position. Joints shall not be "pulled" or "cramped" without approval of the Engineer.

G. Jointing Pipe: After the pipe are aligned in the trench and are ready to be jointed, all joint

surfaces shall be cleaned. H. Alignment and Placement: All piping shall be laid with extreme care as to grade and

alignment. Each pipe shall be so laid as to form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts continuously to the required grade.

3.04 LEACHING BASIN

A. Install leaching basin and cover as indicated on the contract drawings.

3.05 BACKFILLING

A. General: Conduct backfill operations of open-cut trenches closely following laying,

jointing, and bedding of pipe, and after initial inspection and testing are completed, all in accordance with local requirements and the contract documents.

B. Initial backfill shall be placed evenly on both sides of the pipe to distribute the load and

not to cause movement or deflection of the pipe. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops. 2. Flush piping to remove collected debris.

B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has

occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project.

1. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures.

b. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. c. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. d. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

2. Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

3. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.





A. Excavation and backfilling shall be measured in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING of this Specification.

B. Measurement of earthwork materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of

Section 31 0510 SOIL AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK. C. Pipe fittings, connections and all other miscellaneous items associated with and required

for the performance of the Work of this Section will not be measured separately but will be considered incidental to the work of each item.

D. Item No. 33 0000.01 HDPE PIPING will be measured per LINEAR FOOT, installed


E. Item No. 33 0000.02 PVC SLEEVE will be measured per LINEAR FOOT, installed


F. Item No. 33 0000.03 LEACHING BASIN will be measured per EACH, installed



A. The Work measured as provided above will be paid by a payment items. Such price shall


4.03 PAYMENT ITEMS

33 0000.01 HDPE PIPING LINEAR FOOT 33 0000.02 PVC SLEEVE LINEAR FOOT 33 0000.03 LEACHING BASIN EACH

END OF SECTION